Part Number Hot Search : 
6143A YS64V SMB10J17 102M5 SYSTEMS S4025 01010 LM139P
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download TMP86CS28FG Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 8 Bit Microcontroller
TLCS-870/C Series
TMP86CS28FG
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunction or failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of TOSHIBA or the third parties. 070122_C The products described in this document are subject to foreign exchange and foreign trade control laws. 060925_E For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
(c) 2007 TOSHIBA CORPORATION All Rights Reserved
Revision History
Date 2006/12/5 2006/12/14 2007/7/21 Revision 1 2 3 First Release Contents Revised Contents Revised
Table of Contents
TMP86CS28FG
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pin Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 4 5
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Memory Address Map............................................................................................................................... 9 Program Memory (MaskROM).................................................................................................................. 9 Data Memory (RAM) ................................................................................................................................. 9 Clock Generator...................................................................................................................................... 10 Timing Generator .................................................................................................................................... 12 Operation Mode Control Circuit .............................................................................................................. 13
Single-clock mode Dual-clock mode STOP mode Configuration of timing generator Machine cycle
2.2
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3
System Clock Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.2.1 2.2.2.2 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 2.2.4.1 2.2.4.2 2.2.4.3 2.2.4.4
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control ......................................................................................................................... 18
STOP mode IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0) SLOW mode
2.3
Reset Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
External Reset Input ............................................................................................................................... Address trap reset .................................................................................................................................. Watchdog timer reset.............................................................................................................................. System clock reset.................................................................................................................................. 31 32 32 32
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 3.2 Interrupt latches (IL30 to IL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Interrupt enable register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF) .......................................................................................................... 36 Individual interrupt enable flags (EF30 to EF4) ...................................................................................... 37
Note 3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.3 Interrupt Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.4.1 3.4.2 Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows........................................................................ 39 Saving/restoring general-purpose registers ............................................................................................ 40 Interrupt return ........................................................................................................................................ 41
Using PUSH and POP instructions Using data transfer instructions 3.3.2.1 3.3.2.2
3.2.1 3.2.2
3.4
Software Interrupt (INTSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Address error detection .......................................................................................................................... 42 Debugging .............................................................................................................................................. 42
i
3.5 3.6 3.7
Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 External Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 4.2 SFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 DBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5. I/O Ports
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 Port P0 (P00 to P02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P1 (P10 to P17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P2 (P20 to P22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P3 (P30 to P37) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P4 (P40 to P47) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P5 (P50 to P57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P6 (P60 to P67) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P7 (P70 to P77) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port P8 (P80 to P87) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 55 58 59 61 63 65 67 69
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.1 6.2 Watchdog Timer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Watchdog Timer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer ................................................................... Watchdog Timer Enable ......................................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Disable ........................................................................................................................ Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)...................................................................................................... Watchdog Timer Reset ........................................................................................................................... Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS) ................................................................................ Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT) .................................................................................. Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)....................................................................................................... Address Trap Reset ................................................................................................................................ 72 73 74 74 75
6.3
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5
Address Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
76 76 76 77
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 79 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 79 Function .................................................................................................................................................. 80 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 81 Control .................................................................................................................................................... 81 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.2.1 7.2.2
7.2
Divider Output (DVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.1 16-Bit TimerCounter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ii
8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 83 TimerCounter Control ............................................................................................................................. 84 Function .................................................................................................................................................. 85
Timer mode External Trigger Timer Mode Event Counter Mode Window Mode Pulse Width Measurement Mode Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode
8.2
8.1.3.1 8.1.3.2 8.1.3.3 8.1.3.4 8.1.3.5 8.1.3.6
16-Bit TimerCounter 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 97 TimerCounter Control ............................................................................................................................. 98 Function .................................................................................................................................................. 99
Timer mode External Trigger Timer Mode Event Counter Mode Window Mode Pulse Width Measurement Mode Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode
8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3
8.2.3.1 8.2.3.2 8.2.3.3 8.2.3.4 8.2.3.5 8.2.3.6
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 9.2 9.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) .............................................................................................................. 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4) ...................................................................................................... 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)................................................................... 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)................................................................ 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................................................................................ 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4) .............................................................................................. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)........................................................ 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4) ............................................. Warm-Up Counter Mode.......................................................................................................................
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.4 9.3.5 9.3.6 9.3.7 9.3.8 9.3.9
117 118 118 121 123 124 124 127 129
9.3.9.1 9.3.9.2
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 10.2 10.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 TimerCounter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................................ 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6) .................................................................................................... 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6)................................................................. 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6).............................................................. 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6) .......................................................................................................... 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6) ............................................................................................ 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)...................................................... 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6) ........................................... Warm-Up Counter Mode.....................................................................................................................
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1) High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8 10.3.9
137 138 138 141 143 144 144 147 149
10.3.9.1 10.3.9.2
11. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
11.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
iii
11.2 11.3
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Serial clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Clock source ....................................................................................................................................... 153 Shift edge............................................................................................................................................ 155
Leading edge Trailing edge Internal clock External clock 11.3.1.1 11.3.1.2 11.3.2.1 11.3.2.2
11.3.1 11.3.2
11.4 11.5 11.6
Number of bits to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Number of words to transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Transfer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes ............................................................................................................. 156 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes ............................................................................................................. 158 8-bit transfer / receive mode ............................................................................................................... 159
11.6.1 11.6.2 11.6.3
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 166 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 166 167 167 167 168 168 169
161 162 164 165 165 166 166 166
12.8.1 12.8.2
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
12.9.1 12.9.2 12.9.3 12.9.4 12.9.5 12.9.6
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.9 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Sampling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP Bit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit/Receive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Transmit Operation .................................................................................................................... 176 Data Receive Operation ..................................................................................................................... 176 177 177 177 178 178 179
171 172 174 175 175 176 176 176
13.8.1 13.8.2
Status Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Parity Error.......................................................................................................................................... Framing Error...................................................................................................................................... Overrun Error ...................................................................................................................................... Receive Data Buffer Full..................................................................................................................... Transmit Data Buffer Empty ............................................................................................................... Transmit End Flag ..............................................................................................................................
13.9.1 13.9.2 13.9.3 13.9.4 13.9.5 13.9.6
iv
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.1 14.2 14.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Register configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Software Start Mode ........................................................................................................................... 185 Repeat Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 185 Register Setting ................................................................................................................................ 186
14.4 14.5 14.6
14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.3
STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Precautions about AD Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Analog input pin voltage range ........................................................................................................... 189 Analog input shared pins .................................................................................................................... 189 Noise Countermeasure ....................................................................................................................... 189
14.6.1 14.6.2 14.6.3
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
15.1 15.2 15.3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
16. LCD Driver
16.1 16.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
LCD driving methods .......................................................................................................................... 195 Frame frequency................................................................................................................................. 196 Driving method for LCD driver ............................................................................................................ 197
When using the booster circuit (LCDCR="1") When using an external resistor divider (LCDCR="0")
16.2.1 16.2.2 16.2.3
16.3 16.4
16.2.3.1 16.2.3.2
LCD Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Control Method of LCD Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Initial setting ........................................................................................................................................ 201 Store of display data ........................................................................................................................... 201 Example of LCD drive output .............................................................................................................. 204 Display data setting ............................................................................................................................ 199 Blanking .............................................................................................................................................. 200
16.3.1 16.3.2
16.4.1 16.4.2 16.4.3
17. Input/Output Circuitry
17.1 17.2 Control Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Input/Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4
18.2
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Operating Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 DC Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 AD Conversion Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
............................................................................................................................................................... 212
v
18.5 18.6 18.7
AC Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Recommended Oscillating Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Handling Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
19. Package Dimensions
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI).
vi
TMP86CS28FG
CMOS 8-Bit Microcontroller
TMP86CS28FG
Product No. TMP86CS28FG ROM (MaskROM) 61440 bytes RAM 2048 bytes Package QFP80-P-1420-0.80B FLASH MCU TMP86FS28FG Emulation Chip TMP86C989XB
1.1 Features
1. 8-bit single chip microcomputer TLCS-870/C series - Instruction execution time : 0.25 s (at 16 MHz) 122 s (at 32.768 kHz) - 132 types & 731 basic instructions 2. 23interrupt sources (External : 6 Internal : 17) 3. Input / Output ports (62 pins) 4. Watchdog Timer 5. Prescaler - Time base timer - Divider output function 6. 16-bit timer counter: 2 ch - Timer, External trigger, Window, Pulse width measurement, Event counter, Programmable pulse generate (PPG) modes 7. 8-bit timer counter : 4 ch - Timer, Event counter, Programmable divider output (PDO), Pulse width modulation (PWM) output, Programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes 8. 8-bit UART/SIO: 1 ch 9. 8-bit UART : 1 ch
* The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. 021023_D * TOSHIBA is continually working to improve the quality and reliability of its products. Nevertheless, semiconductor devices in general can malfunction or fail due to their inherent electrical sensitivity and vulnerability to physical stress. It is the responsibility of the buyer, when utilizing TOSHIBA products, to comply with the standards of safety in making a safe design for the entire system, and to avoid situations in which a malfunction or failure of such TOSHIBA products could cause loss of human life, bodily injury or damage to property. In developing your designs, please ensure that TOSHIBA products are used within specified operating ranges as set forth in the most recent TOSHIBA products specifications. Also, please keep in mind the precautions and conditions set forth in the "Handling Guide for Semiconductor Devices," or "TOSHIBA Semiconductor Reliability Handbook" etc. 021023_A * The TOSHIBA products listed in this document are intended for usage in general electronics applications (computer, personal equipment, office equipment, measuring equipment, industrial robotics, domestic appliances, etc.). These TOSHIBA products are neither intended nor warranted for usage in equipment that requires extraordinarily high quality and/or reliability or a malfunctionor failure of which may cause loss of human life or bodily injury ("Unintended Usage"). Unintended Usage include atomic energy control instruments, airplane or spaceship instruments, transportation instruments, traffic signal instruments, combustion control instruments, medical instruments, all types of safety devices, etc. Unintended Usage of TOSHIBA products listed in this document shall be made at the customer's own risk. 021023_B * The products described in this document shall not be used or embedded to any downstream products of which manufacture, use and/or sale are prohibited under any applicable laws and regulations. 060106_Q * The information contained herein is presented only as a guide for the applications of our products. No responsibility is assumed by TOSHIBA for any infringements of patents or other rights of the third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of TOSHIBA or the third parties. 070122_C * The products described in this document are subject to foreign exchange and foreign trade control laws. 060925_E * For a discussion of how the reliability of microcontrollers can be predicted, please refer to Section 1.3 of the chapter entitled Quality and Reliability Assurance/Handling Precautions. 030619_S
Page 1
1.1 Features
TMP86CS28FG
10. 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter - Analog input: 8 ch 11. Key-on wakeup : 4 ch 12. LCD driver/controller Built-in voltage booster for LCD driver With display memory LCD direct drive capability (MAX 40 seg x 4 com) 1/4,1/3,1/2duties or static drive are programmably selectable 13. Clock operation Single clock mode Dual clock mode 14. Low power consumption operation STOP mode: Oscillation stops. (Battery/Capacitor back-up.) SLOW1 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock stop.) SLOW2 mode: Low power consumption operation using low-frequency clock.(High-frequency clock oscillate.) IDLE0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. IDLE1 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high frequency clock. Release by interruputs(CPU restarts). IDLE2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. Release by interruputs. (CPU restarts). SLEEP0 mode: CPU stops, and only the Time-Based-Timer(TBT) on peripherals operate using low frequency clock.Release by falling edge of the source clock which is set by TBTCR. SLEEP1 mode: CPU stops, and peripherals operate using low frequency clock. Release by interruput.(CPU restarts). SLEEP2 mode: CPU stops and peripherals operate using high and low frequency clock. interruput. 15. Wide operation voltage:
2.7 V to 5.5 V at 8MHz /32.768 kHz 4.0 V to 5.5 V at 16 MHz /32.768 kHz
Release by
Page 2
1.2 Pin Assignment
(SEG6) P81 (SEG5) P82 (SEG4) P83 (SEG3) P84 (SEG2) P85 (SEG1) P86 (SEG0) P87 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 V3 V2 V1 C1 C0
65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
VSS XIN XOUT TEST VDD (XTIN) P21 (XTOUT) P22
RESET
Figure 1-1 Pin Assignment
Page 3
(INT5/STOP) P20 P00 P01 (INT3/PPG10) P02 AVDD VAREF (AIN0) P10 (AIN1) P11 (STOP2/AIN2) P12 (STOP3/AIN3) P13 (STOP4/AIN4) P14 (STOP5/AIN5) P15 (AIN6) P16 (AIN7) P17 AVSS (INT0) P30
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P80 (SEG7) P77 (SEG8) P76 (SEG9) P75 (SEG10) P74 (SEG11) P73 (SEG12) P72 (SEG13) P71 (SEG14) P70 (SEG15) P67 (SEG16) P66 (SEG17) P65 (SEG18) P64 (SEG19) P63 (SEG20) P62 (SEG21) P61 (SEG22) P60 (SEG23) P57 (SEG24) P56 (SEG25) P55 (SEG26/TC6/PDO6/PWM6/PPG6) P54 (SEG27/TC5/PDO5/PWM5) P53 (SEG28/TC4/PDO4/PWM4/PPG4) P52 (SEG29/TC3/PDO3/PWM3) P51 (SEG30/RXD0)
P50 (SEG31/TXD0) P47 (SEG32) P46 (SEG33) P45 (SEG34) P44 (SEG35) P43 (SEG36/TC11) P42 (SEG37/PPG11) P41 (SEG38/INT2) P40 (SEG39/INT1) P37 (TC10/INT4) P36(SCK) P35(SI/TXD1) P34(SO/RXD1) P33 P32 P31(DVO)
TMP86CS28FG
1.3 Block Diagram
TMP86CS28FG
1.3 Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 Block Diagram
Page 4
TMP86CS28FG
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(1/4)
Pin Name P02
PPG10
Pin Number
Input/Output IO O I IO IO IO I IO I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I I IO I IO I IO O PORT02 PPG10 output External interrupt 3 input PORT01 PORT00 PORT17 Analog Input7 PORT16 Analog Input6 PORT15 Analog Input5 STOP5 input PORT14 Analog Input4 STOP4 input PORT13 Analog Input3 STOP3 input PORT12 Analog Input2 STOP2 input PORT11 Analog Input1 PORT10 Analog Input0
Functions
12
INT3 P01 P00 P17 AIN7 P16 AIN6 P15 AIN5 STOP5 P14 AIN4 STOP4 P13 AIN3 STOP3 P12 AIN2 STOP2 P11 AIN1 P10 AIN0 P22 XTOUT 11 10 22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
7
PORT22 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT21 Resonator connecting pins(32.768kHz) for inputting external clock PORT20 STOP mode release signal input External interrupt 5 input PORT37 TC10 input External interrupt 4 input PORT36 Serial Clock I/O PORT35 Serial Data Input UART data output 1 PORT34 Serial Data Output UART data input 1 PORT33
P21 XTIN P20
STOP INT5
6
IO I IO I I IO I I IO IO IO I O IO O I IO
9
P37 TC10 INT4 P36
SCK
31
30
P35 SI TXD1 P34 SO RXD1 P33
29
28
27
Page 5
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86CS28FG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(2/4)
Pin Name P32 P31
DVO
Pin Number 26 25
Input/Output IO IO O IO I IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O I IO O O IO O I IO O I IO O IO O IO O I O IO O I O IO O I O IO O I O IO O I IO O O PORT32 PORT31 Divider Output PORT30 External interrupt 0 input PORT47 LCD segment output 32 PORT46 LCD segment output 33 PORT45 LCD segment output 34 PORT44 LCD segment output 35 PORT43 LCD segment output 36 TC11 input PORT42 LCD segment output 37 PPG11 output PORT41 LCD segment output 38 External interrupt 2 input PORT40 LCD segment output 39 External interrupt 1 input PORT57 LCD segment output 24 PORT56 LCD segment output 25
Functions
P30
INT0
24
P47 SEG32 P46 SEG33 P45 SEG34 P44 SEG35 P43 SEG36 TC11 P42 SEG37
PPG11
39
38
37
36
35
34
P41 SEG38 INT2 P40 SEG39 INT1 P57 SEG24 P56 SEG25 P55 SEG26 TC6
PDO6/PWM6/PPG6
33
32
47
46
45
PORT55 LCD segment output 26 TC6 input PDO6/PWM6/PPG6 output PORT54 LCD segment output 27 TC5 input PDO5/PWM5 output PORT53 LCD segment output 28 TC4 input PDO4/PWM4/PPG4 output PORT52 LCD segment output 29 TC3 input PORT51 LCD segment output 30 UART data input 0 PORT50 LCD segment output 31 UART data output 0
P54 SEG27 TC5
PDO5/PWM5
44
P53 SEG28 TC4
PDO4/PWM4/PPG4
43
P52 SEG29 TC3
PDO3/PWM3
42
P51 SEG30 RXD0 P50 SEG31 TXD0
41
40
Page 6
TMP86CS28FG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(3/4)
Pin Name P67 SEG16 P66 SEG17 P65 SEG18 P64 SEG19 P63 SEG20 P62 SEG21 P61 SEG22 P60 SEG23 P77 SEG8 P76 SEG9 P75 SEG10 P74 SEG11 P73 SEG12 P72 SEG13 P71 SEG14 P70 SEG15 P87 SEG0 P86 SEG1 P85 SEG2 P84 SEG3 P83 SEG4 P82 SEG5 P81 SEG6 Pin Number 55 Input/Output IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O IO O PORT67 LCD segment output 16 PORT66 LCD segment output 17 PORT65 LCD segment output 18 PORT64 LCD segment output 19 PORT63 LCD segment output 20 PORT62 LCD segment output 21 PORT61 LCD segment output 22 PORT60 LCD segment output 23 PORT77 LCD segment output 8 PORT76 LCD segment output 9 PORT75 LCD segment output 10 PORT74 LCD segment output 11 PORT73 LCD segment output 12 PORT72 LCD segment output 13 PORT71 LCD segment output 14 PORT70 LCD segment output 15 PORT87 LCD segment output 0 PORT86 LCD segment output 1 PORT85 LCD segment output 2 PORT84 LCD segment output 3 PORT83 LCD segment output 4 PORT82 LCD segment output 5 PORT81 LCD segment output 6 Functions
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
Page 7
1.4 Pin Names and Functions
TMP86CS28FG
Table 1-1 Pin Names and Functions(4/4)
Pin Name P80 SEG7 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 V3 V2 V1 C1 C0 XIN XOUT
RESET
Pin Number 64 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 2 3 8 4 14 13 23 5 1
Input/Output IO O O O O O I I I I I I O I I I I I I I PORT80 LCD segment output 7 LCD common output 3 LCD common output 2 LCD common output 1 LCD common output 0 LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin LCD voltage booster pin
Functions
Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Resonator connecting pins for high-frequency clock Reset signal Test pin for out-going test. Normally, be fixed to low. Analog Base Voltage Input Pin for A/D Conversion Analog Power Supply Analog Power Supply Power Supply 0(GND)
TEST VAREF AVDD AVSS VDD VSS
Page 8
TMP86CS28FG
2. Operational Description
2.1 CPU Core Functions
The CPU core consists of a CPU, a system clock controller, and an interrupt controller. This section provides a description of the CPU core, the program memory, the data memory, and the reset circuit.
2.1.1
Memory Address Map
The TMP86CS28FG memory is composed MaskROM, RAM, DBR(Data buffer register) and SFR(Special function register). They are all mapped in 64-Kbyte address space. Figure 2-1 shows the memory address map.
TMP86CS28FG
0000H
SFR
003FH 0040H
64 bytes
SFR:
RAM
083FH 0F00H
2048 bytes
RAM:
Special function register includes: I/O ports Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers System control registers Program status word Random access memory includes: Data memory Stack
DBR:
DBR
0FFFH 1000H
256 bytes
MaskROM:
Data buffer register includes: Peripheral control registers Peripheral status registers LCD display memory Program memory
MaskROM
FFA0H FFBFH FFC0H FFDFH FFE0H FFFFH
61440 bytes
Vector table for interrupts (32 bytes) Vector table for vector call instructions (32 bytes) Vector table for interrupts (32 bytes)
Figure 2-1 Memory Address Map 2.1.2 Program Memory (MaskROM)
The TMP86CS28FG has a 61440 bytes (Address 1000H to FFFFH) of program memory (MaskROM ).
2.1.3
Data Memory (RAM)
The TMP86CS28FG has 2048 bytes (Address 0040H to 083FH) of internal RAM. The first 192 bytes (0040H to 00FFH) of the internal RAM are located in the direct area; instructions with shorten operations are available against such an area. Page 9
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS28FG
The data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the data memory should be initialized by an initialization routine.
Example :Clears RAM to "00H". (TMP86CS28FG)
LD LD LD SRAMCLR: LD INC DEC JRS HL, 0040H A, H BC, 07FFH (HL), A HL BC F, SRAMCLR ; Start address setup ; Initial value (00H) setup
2.2 System Clock Controller
The system clock controller consists of a clock generator, a timing generator, and a standby controller.
Timing generator control register Clock generator
XIN fc TBTCR 0036H
High-frequency clock oscillator
XOUT XTIN
Timing generator
fs
Standby controller
0038H SYSCR1 0039H SYSCR2
Low-frequency clock oscillator
XTOUT
System clocks Clock generator control
System control registers
Figure 2-2 System Colck Control 2.2.1 Clock Generator
The clock generator generates the basic clock which provides the system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware. It contains two oscillation circuits: One for the high-frequency clock and one for the low-frequency clock. Power consumption can be reduced by switching of the standby controller to low-power operation based on the low-frequency clock. The high-frequency (fc) clock and low-frequency (fs) clock can easily be obtained by connecting a resonator between the XIN/XOUT and XTIN/XTOUT pins respectively. Clock input from an external oscillator is also possible. In this case, external clock is applied to XIN/XTIN pin with XOUT/XTOUT pin not connected.
Page 10
TMP86CS28FG
High-frequency clock XIN XOUT XIN XOUT (Open) XTIN
Low-frequency clock XTOUT XTIN XTOUT (Open)
(a) Crystal/Ceramic resonator
(b) External oscillator
(c) Crystal
(d) External oscillator
Figure 2-3 Examples of Resonator Connection
Note:The function to monitor the basic clock directly at external is not provided for hardware, however, with disabling all interrupts and watchdog timers, the oscillation frequency can be adjusted by monitoring the pulse which the fixed frequency is outputted to the port by the program. The system to require the adjustment of the oscillation frequency should create the program for the adjustment in advance.
Page 11
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS28FG
2.2.2
Timing Generator
The timing generator generates the various system clocks supplied to the CPU core and peripheral hardware from the basic clock (fc or fs). The timing generator provides the following functions. 1. Generation of main system clock 2. Generation of divider output (DVO) pulses 3. Generation of source clocks for time base timer 4. Generation of source clocks for watchdog timer 5. Generation of internal source clocks for timer/counters 6. Generation of warm-up clocks for releasing STOP mode 7. LCD
2.2.2.1
Configuration of timing generator
The timing generator consists of a 2-stage prescaler, a 21-stage divider, a main system clock generator, and machine cycle counters. An input clock to the 7th stage of the divider depends on the operating mode, SYSCR2 and TBTCR, that is shown in Figure 2-4. As reset and STOP mode started/canceled, the prescaler and the divider are cleared to "0".
fc or fs
Main system clock generator
SYSCK DV7CK
Machine cycle counters
High-frequency clock fc Low-frequency clock fs
12
fc/4
S A 123456 B Y
Divider
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 S B0 B1 A0 Y0 A1 Y1
Multiplexer
Multiplexer
Warm-up controller
Watchdog timer
Timer counter, Serial interface, Time-base-timer, divider output, etc. (Peripheral functions)
Figure 2-4 Configuration of Timing Generator
Page 12
TMP86CS28FG
Timing Generator Control Register
TBTCR (0036H) 7 (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 DV7CK 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DV7CK
Selection of input to the 7th stage of the divider
0: fc/28 [Hz] 1: fs
R/W
Note 1: In single clock mode, do not set DV7CK to "1". Note 2: Do not set "1" on DV7CK while the low-frequency clock is not operated stably. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 4: In SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the DV7CK setting is ineffective, and fs is input to the 7th stage of the divider. Note 5: When STOP mode is entered from NORMAL1/2 mode, the DV7CK setting is ineffective during the warm-up period after release of STOP mode, and the 6th stage of the divider is input to the 7th stage during this period.
2.2.2.2
Machine cycle
Instruction execution and peripheral hardware operation are synchronized with the main system clock. The minimum instruction execution unit is called an "machine cycle". There are a total of 10 different types of instructions for the TLCS-870/C Series: Ranging from 1-cycle instructions which require one machine cycle for execution to 10-cycle instructions which require 10 machine cycles for execution. A machine cycle consists of 4 states (S0 to S3), and each state consists of one main system clock.
1/fc or 1/fs [s]
Main system clock
State
S0
S1
S2
S3
S0
S1
S2
S3
Machine cycle
Figure 2-5 Machine Cycle 2.2.3 Operation Mode Control Circuit
The operation mode control circuit starts and stops the oscillation circuits for the high-frequency and lowfrequency clocks, and switches the main system clock. There are three operating modes: Single clock mode, dual clock mode and STOP mode. These modes are controlled by the system control registers (SYSCR1 and SYSCR2). Figure 2-6 shows the operating mode transition diagram.
2.2.3.1
Single-clock mode
Only the oscillation circuit for the high-frequency clock is used, and P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins are used as input/output ports. The main-system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock. In the single-clock mode, the machine cycle time is 4/fc [s]. (1) NORMAL1 mode In this mode, both the CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock. The TMP86CS28FG is placed in this mode after reset.
Page 13
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS28FG
(2)
IDLE1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remains active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock). IDLE1 mode is started by SYSCR2 = "1", and IDLE1 mode is released to NORMAL1 mode by an interrupt request from the on-chip peripherals or external interrupt inputs. When the IMF (Interrupt master enable flag) is "1" (Interrupt enable), the execution will resume with the acceptance of the interrupt, and the operation will return to normal after the interrupt service is completed. When the IMF is "0" (Interrupt disable), the execution will resume with the instruction which follows the IDLE1 mode start instruction.
(3)
IDLE0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by SYSCR2 = "1". When IDLE0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from IDLE0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering NORMAL1 mode back again. IDLE0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When IDLE0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to NORMAL1 mode.
2.2.3.2
Dual-clock mode
Both the high-frequency and low-frequency oscillation circuits are used in this mode. P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XTOUT) pins cannot be used as input/output ports. The main system clock is obtained from the high-frequency clock in NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and is obtained from the low-frequency clock in SLOW and SLEEP modes. The machine cycle time is 4/fc [s] in the NORMAL2 and IDLE2 modes, and 4/fs [s] (122 s at fs = 32.768 kHz) in the SLOW and SLEEP modes. The TLCS-870/C is placed in the signal-clock mode during reset. To use the dual-clock mode, the lowfrequency oscillator should be turned on at the start of a program. (1) NORMAL2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the high-frequency clock. On-chip peripherals operate using the high-frequency clock and/or low-frequency clock. (2) SLOW2 mode In this mode, the CPU core operates with the low-frequency clock, while both the high-frequency clock and the low-frequency clock are operated. As the SYSCR2 becomes "1", the hardware changes into SLOW2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into NORMAL2 mode. As the SYSCR2 becomes "0", the hardware changes into SLOW1 mode. Do not clear SYSCR2 to "0" during SLOW2 mode. (3) SLOW1 mode This mode can be used to reduce power-consumption by turning off oscillation of the high-frequency clock. The CPU core and on-chip peripherals operate using the low-frequency clock.
Page 14
TMP86CS28FG
Switching back and forth between SLOW1 and SLOW2 modes are performed by SYSCR2. In SLOW1 and SLEEP modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (4) IDLE2 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit remain active. The CPU and the watchdog timer are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the high-frequency clock and/or the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of IDLE2 mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to NORMAL2 mode. (5) SLEEP1 mode In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit of the low-frequency clock remains active. The CPU, the watchdog timer, and the internal oscillation circuit of the high-frequency clock are halted; however, on-chip peripherals remain active (Operate using the low-frequency clock). Starting and releasing of SLEEP mode are the same as for IDLE1 mode, except that operation returns to SLOW1 mode. In SLOW1 and SLEEP1 modes, the input clock to the 1st stage of the divider is stopped; output from the 1st to 6th stages is also stopped. (6) SLEEP2 mode The SLEEP2 mode is the idle mode corresponding to the SLOW2 mode. The status under the SLEEP2 mode is same as that under the SLEEP1 mode, except for the oscillation circuit of the highfrequency clock. (7) SLEEP0 mode In this mode, all the circuit, except oscillator and the timer-base-timer, stops operation. This mode is enabled by setting "1" on bit SYSCR2. When SLEEP0 mode starts, the CPU stops and the timing generator stops feeding the clock to the peripheral circuits other than TBT. Then, upon detecting the falling edge of the source clock selected with TBTCR, the timing generator starts feeding the clock to all peripheral circuits. When returned from SLEEP0 mode, the CPU restarts operating, entering SLOW1 mode back again. SLEEP0 mode is entered and returned regardless of how TBTCR is set. When IMF = "1", EF6 (TBT interrupt individual enable flag) = "1", and TBTCR = "1", interrupt processing is performed. When SLEEP0 mode is entered while TBTCR = "1", the INTTBT interrupt latch is set after returning to SLOW1 mode.
2.2.3.3
STOP mode
In this mode, the internal oscillation circuit is turned off, causing all system operations to be halted. The internal status immediately prior to the halt is held with a lowest power consumption during STOP mode. STOP mode is started by the system control register 1 (SYSCR1), and STOP mode is released by a inputting (Either level-sensitive or edge-sensitive can be programmably selected) to the STOP pin. After the warm-up period is completed, the execution resumes with the instruction which follows the STOP mode start instruction.
Page 15
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS28FG
IDLE0 mode
Reset release
RESET
IDLE1 mode (a) Single-clock mode
Note 2 SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" NORMAL1 mode Interrupt STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "0" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" STOP SYSCR2 = "1" SLOW2 mode Interrupt SYSCR2 = "1" SYSCR2 = "0" SLOW1 mode SYSCR1 = "1" STOP pin input SYSCR2 = "1" SLEEP0 mode
IDLE2 mode
Interrupt
NORMAL2 mode
SYSCR2 = "0" SLEEP2 mode
SLEEP1 mode (b) Dual-clock mode
SYSCR2 = "1" Interrupt Note 2
Note 1: NORMAL1 and NORMAL2 modes are generically called NORMAL; SLOW1 and SLOW2 are called SLOW; IDLE0, IDLE1 and IDLE2 are called IDLE; SLEEP0, SLEEP1 and SLEEP2 are called SLEEP. Note 2: The mode is released by falling edge of TBTCR setting.
Figure 2-6 Operating Mode Transition Diagram
Table 2-1 Operating Mode and Conditions
Oscillator Operating Mode High Frequency Low Frequency CPU Core TBT Other Peripherals Reset Operate 4/fc [s] Machine Cycle Time
RESET NORMAL1 Single clock IDLE1 IDLE0 STOP NORMAL2 IDLE2 SLOW2 Dual clock SLEEP2 SLOW1 SLEEP1 SLEEP0 STOP Stop Stop Oscillation Stop Oscillation
Reset Operate Stop Halt
Reset
Operate
Halt Operate with high frequency
Halt
-
4/fc [s]
Oscillation
Halt Operate with low frequency Halt Operate with low frequency Operate
Operate
4/fs [s]
Halt Halt
Halt
-
Page 16
TMP86CS28FG
System Control Register 1
SYSCR1 (0038H) 7 STOP 6 RELM 5 RETM 4 OUTEN 3 WUT 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 00**)
STOP RELM RETM OUTEN
STOP mode start Release method for STOP mode Operating mode after STOP mode Port output during STOP mode
0: CPU core and peripherals remain active 1: CPU core and peripherals are halted (Start STOP mode) 0: Edge-sensitive release 1: Level-sensitive release 0: Return to NORMAL1/2 mode 1: Return to SLOW1 mode 0: High impedance 1: Output kept Return to NORMAL mode Return to SLOW mode 3 x 213/fs 213/fs 3 x 26/fs 26/fs
R/W R/W R/W R/W
WUT
Warm-up time at releasing STOP mode
00 01 10 11
3 x 216/fc 216/fc 3 x 214/fc 214/fc
R/W
Note 1: Always set RETM to "0" when transiting from NORMAL mode to STOP mode. Always set RETM to "1" when transiting from SLOW mode to STOP mode. Note 2: When STOP mode is released with RESET pin input, a return is made to NORMAL1 regardless of the RETM contents. Note 3: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care Note 4: Bits 1 and 0 in SYSCR1 are read as undefined data when a read instruction is executed. Note 5: As the hardware becomes STOP mode under OUTEN = "0", input value is fixed to "0"; therefore it may cause external interrupt request on account of falling edge. Note 6: When the key-on wakeup is used, RELM should be set to "1". Note 7: Port P20 is used as STOP pin. Therefore, when stop mode is started, OUTEN does not affect to P20, and P20 becomes High-Z mode. Note 8: The warmig-up time should be set correctly for using oscillator.
System Control Register 2
SYSCR2 (0039H) 7 XEN 6 XTEN 5 SYSCK 4 IDLE 3 2
TGHALT
1
0 (Initial value: 1000 *0**)
XEN XTEN
High-frequency oscillator control Low-frequency oscillator control Main system clock select (Write)/main system clock monitor (Read) CPU and watchdog timer control (IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) TG control (IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes)
0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: Turn off oscillation 1: Turn on oscillation 0: High-frequency clock (NORMAL1/NORMAL2/IDLE1/IDLE2) 1: Low-frequency clock (SLOW1/SLOW2/SLEEP1/SLEEP2) 0: CPU and watchdog timer remain active 1: CPU and watchdog timer are stopped (Start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes) 0: Feeding clock to all peripherals from TG 1: Stop feeding clock to peripherals except TBT from TG. (Start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes) R/W R/W
SYSCK
IDLE
TGHALT
Note 1: A reset is applied if both XEN and XTEN are cleared to "0", XEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "0", or XTEN is cleared to "0" when SYSCK = "1". Note 2: *: Don't care, TG: Timing generator, *; Don't care Note 3: Bits 3, 1 and 0 in SYSCR2 are always read as undefined value. Note 4: Do not set IDLE and TGHALT to "1" simultaneously. Note 5: Because returning from IDLE0/SLEEP0 to NORMAL1/SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode might be shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 6: When IDLE1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode is released, IDLE is automatically cleared to "0". Note 7: When IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released, TGHALT is automatically cleared to "0". Note 8: Before setting TGHALT to "1", be sure to stop peripherals. If peripherals are not stopped, the interrupt latch of peripherals may be set after IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode is released.
Page 17
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS28FG
2.2.4
Operating Mode Control
STOP mode
STOP mode is controlled by the system control register 1, the STOP pin input and key-on wakeup input (STOP5 to STOP2) which is controlled by the STOP mode release control register (STOPCR). The STOP pin is also used both as a port P20 and an INT5 (external interrupt input 5) pin. STOP mode is started by setting SYSCR1 to "1". During STOP mode, the following status is maintained. 1. Oscillations are turned off, and all internal operations are halted. 2. The data memory, registers, the program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before STOP mode was entered. 3. The prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". 4. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction (e.g., [SET (SYSCR1).7]) which started STOP mode. STOP mode includes a level-sensitive mode and an edge-sensitive mode, either of which can be selected with the SYSCR1. Do not use any key-on wakeup input (STOP5 to STOP2) for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive mode.
2.2.4.1
Note 1: The STOP mode can be released by either the STOP or key-on wakeup pin (STOP5 to STOP2). However, because the STOP pin is different from the key-on wakeup and can not inhibit the release input, the STOP pin must be used for releasing STOP mode. Note 2: During STOP period (from start of STOP mode to end of warm up), due to changes in the external interrupt pin signal, interrupt latches may be set to "1" and interrupts may be accepted immediately after STOP mode is released. Before starting STOP mode, therefore, disable interrupts. Also, before enabling interrupts after STOP mode is released, clear unnecessary interrupt latches.
(1)
Level-sensitive release mode (RELM = "1") In this mode, STOP mode is released by setting the STOP pin high or setting the STOP5 to STOP2 pin input which is enabled by STOPCR. This mode is used for capacitor backup when the main power supply is cut off and long term battery backup. Even if an instruction for starting STOP mode is executed while STOP pin input is high or STOP5
to STOP2 input is low, STOP mode does not start but instead the warm-up sequence starts immediately. Thus, to start STOP mode in the level-sensitive release mode, it is necessary for the program to first confirm that the STOP pin input is low or STOP5 to STOP2 input is high. The following two methods can be used for confirmation. 1. Testing a port. 2. Using an external interrupt input INT5 (INT5 is a falling edge-sensitive input). Example 1 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode by testing a port P20.
LD SSTOPH: TEST JRS DI SET (SYSCR1). 7 (SYSCR1), 01010000B (P2PRD). 0 F, SSTOPH ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode ; Wait until the STOP pin input goes low level
Page 18
TMP86CS28FG
Example 2 :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode with an INT5 interrupt.
PINT5: TEST JRS LD DI SET SINT5: RETI (SYSCR1). 7 (P2PRD). 0 F, SINT5 (SYSCR1), 01010000B ; To reject noise, STOP mode does not start if port P20 is at high ; Sets up the level-sensitive release mode. ; IMF 0 ; Starts STOP mode
STOP pin XOUT pin NORMAL operation STOP operation Confirm by program that the STOP pin input is low and start STOP mode.
VIH
Warm up
NORMAL operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware. Always released if the STOP pin input is high.
Figure 2-7 Level-sensitive Release Mode
Note 1: Even if the STOP pin input is low after warm-up start, the STOP mode is not restarted. Note 2: In this case of changing to the level-sensitive mode from the edge-sensitive mode, the release mode is not switched until a rising edge of the STOP pin input is detected.
(2)
Edge-sensitive release mode (RELM = "0") In this mode, STOP mode is released by a rising edge of the STOP pin input. This is used in applications where a relatively short program is executed repeatedly at periodic intervals. This periodic signal (for example, a clock from a low-power consumption oscillator) is input to the STOP pin. In the edge-sensitive release mode, STOP mode is started even when the STOP pin input is high level. Do not use any STOP5 to STOP2 pin input for releasing STOP mode in edge-sensitive release mode.
Example :Starting STOP mode from NORMAL mode
DI LD (SYSCR1), 10010000B ; IMF 0 ; Starts after specified to the edge-sensitive release mode
STOP pin XOUT pin
NORMAL operation STOP mode started by the program. STOP operation
VIH
Warm up NORMAL operation
STOP operation
STOP mode is released by the hardware at the rising edge of STOP pin input.
Figure 2-8 Edge-sensitive Release Mode
Page 19
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS28FG
STOP mode is released by the following sequence. 1. In the dual-clock mode, when returning to NORMAL2, both the high-frequency and lowfrequency clock oscillators are turned on; when returning to SLOW1 mode, only the lowfrequency clock oscillator is turned on. In the single-clock mode, only the high-frequency clock oscillator is turned on. 2. A warm-up period is inserted to allow oscillation time to stabilize. During warm up, all internal operations remain halted. Four different warm-up times can be selected with the SYSCR1 in accordance with the resonator characteristics. 3. When the warm-up time has elapsed, normal operation resumes with the instruction following the STOP mode start instruction.
Note 1: When the STOP mode is released, the start is made after the prescaler and the divider of the timing generator are cleared to "0". Note 2: STOP mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin, which immediately performs the normal reset operation. Note 3: When STOP mode is released with a low hold voltage, the following cautions must be observed. The power supply voltage must be at the operating voltage level before releasing STOP mode. The RESET pin input must also be "H" level, rising together with the power supply voltage. In this case, if an external time constant circuit has been connected, the RESET pin input voltage will increase at a slower pace than the power supply voltage. At this time, there is a danger that a reset may occur if input voltage level of the RESET pin drops below the non-inverting high-level input voltage (Hysteresis input).
Table 2-2 Warm-up Time Example (at fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Warm-up Time [ms] WUT Return to NORMAL Mode 00 01 10 11 12.288 4.096 3.072 1.024 Return to SLOW Mode 750 250 5.85 1.95
Note 1: The warm-up time is obtained by dividing the basic clock by the divider. Therefore, the warm-up time may include a certain amount of error if there is any fluctuation of the oscillation frequency when STOP mode is released. Thus, the warm-up time must be considered as an approximate value.
Page 20
Turn off
Oscillator circuit
Turn on
Main system clock a+3 SET (SYSCR1). 7 n+1 (a) STOP mode start (Example: Start with SET (SYSCR1). 7 instruction located at address a) n+2 n+3 n+4 Halt
Program counter
a+2
Instruction execution
Divider
n
0
Figure 2-9 STOP Mode Start/Release
a+4
Instruction address a + 2
Page 21
0 1 (b) STOP mode release
Warm up
STOP pin input
Oscillator circuit
Turn off
Turn on
Main system clock a+5
Instruction address a + 3
Program counter
a+3
a+6
Instruction address a + 4
Instruction execution
Halt
Divider
0
Count up
2
3
TMP86CS28FG
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS28FG
2.2.4.2
IDLE1/2 mode and SLEEP1/2 mode
IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and maskable interrupts. The following status is maintained during these modes. 1. Operation of the CPU and watchdog timer (WDT) is halted. On-chip peripherals continue to operate. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before these modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts these modes.
Starting IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Yes Reset input No No Interrupt request Yes "0" IMF
Reset
Normal release mode
"1" (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction
Figure 2-10 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes
Page 22
TMP86CS28FG
* Start the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes After IMF is set to "0", set the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) which releases IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. To start IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master enable flag (IMF). After releasing IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes. IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode. (1) Normal release mode (IMF = "0") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled by the individual interrupt enable flag (EF). After the interrupt is generated, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start instruction. Normally, the interrupt latches (IL) of the interrupt source used for releasing must be cleared to "0" by load instructions. (2) Interrupt release mode (IMF = "1") IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are released by any interrupt source enabled with the individual interrupt enable flag (EF) and the interrupt processing is started. After the interrupt is processed, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the instruction, which starts IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes.
Note: When a watchdog timer interrupts is generated immediately before IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes are started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes will not be started.
Page 23
Main system clock
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Interrupt request a+2 SET (SYSCR2). 4 Operate Halt a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
Watchdog timer
(a) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a)
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+3 Instruction address a + 2 Operate Normal release mode a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-11 IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes Start/Release
Page 24
a+3 Acceptance of interrupt Operate Operate Interrupt release mode
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
Interrupt request
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
TMP86CS28FG
(b) IDLE1/2 and SLEEP1/2 modes release
TMP86CS28FG
2.2.4.3
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes (IDLE0, SLEEP0)
IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2) and the time base timer control register (TBTCR). The following status is maintained during IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. 1. Timing generator stops feeding clock to peripherals except TBT. 2. The data memory, CPU registers, program status word and port output latches are all held in the status in effect before IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes were entered. 3. The program counter holds the address 2 ahead of the instruction which starts IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes.
Note: Before starting IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, be sure to stop (Disable) peripherals.
Stopping peripherals by instruction
Starting IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes by instruction
CPU and WDT are halted
Reset input No No TBT source clock falling edge Yes TBTCR = "1" Yes TBT interrupt enable Yes No IMF = "1"
Yes
Reset
No
No
(Normal release mode)
Yes (Interrupt release mode) Interrupt processing
Execution of the instruction which follows the IDLE0, SLEEP0 modes start instruction
Figure 2-12 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes
Page 25
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS28FG
* Start the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes Stop (Disable) peripherals such as a timer counter. To start IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, set SYSCR2 to "1". * Release the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes include a normal release mode and an interrupt release mode. These modes are selected by interrupt master flag (IMF), the individual interrupt enable flag of TBT and TBTCR. After releasing IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes, the SYSCR2 is automatically cleared to "0" and the operation mode is returned to the mode preceding IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1". IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start/release without reference to TBTCR setting.
(1)
Normal release mode (IMF*EF6*TBTCR = "0") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR. After the falling edge is detected, the program operation is resumed from the instruction following the IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start instruction. Before starting the IDLE0 or SLEEP0 mode, when the TBTCR is set to "1", INTTBT interrupt latch is set to "1".
(2)
Interrupt release mode (IMF*EF6*TBTCR = "1") IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes are released by the source clock falling edge, which is setting by the TBTCR and INTTBT interrupt processing is started.
Note 1: Because returning from IDLE0, SLEEP0 to NORMAL1, SLOW1 is executed by the asynchronous internal clock, the period of IDLE0, SLEEP0 mode might be the shorter than the period setting by TBTCR. Note 2: When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated immediately before IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode is started, the watchdog timer interrupt will be processed but IDLE0/SLEEP0 mode will not be started.
Page 26
Main system clock
Interrupt request a+2 a+3
Program counter
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 2
Halt
Watchdog timer
Operate
(a) IDLE0 and SLEEP0 modes start (Example: Starting with the SET instruction located at address a
Main system clock
TBT clock a+3 a+4
Program counter
Figure 2-13 IDLE0 and SLEEP0 Modes Start/Release
Page 27
Instruction address a + 2 Operate
Normal release mode a+3
Instruction execution
Halt
Watchdog timer
Halt
Main system clock
TBT clock
Program counter
Instruction execution
Halt
Acceptance of interrupt Operate
Interrupt release mode
(b) IDLE and SLEEP0 modes release
TMP86CS28FG
Watchdog timer
Halt
2. Operational Description
2.2 System Clock Controller TMP86CS28FG
2.2.4.4
SLOW mode
SLOW mode is controlled by the system control register 2 (SYSCR2). The following is the methods to switch the mode with the warm-up counter. (1) Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode First, set SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2 mode. Next, clear SYSCR2 to turn off high-frequency oscillation.
Note: The high-frequency clock can be continued oscillation in order to return to NORMAL2 mode from SLOW mode quickly. Always turn off oscillation of high-frequency clock when switching from SLOW mode to stop mode.
Example 1 :Switching from NORMAL2 mode to SLOW1 mode.
SET (SYSCR2). 5 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock for SLOW2) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation)
Example 2 :Switching to the SLOW1 mode after low-frequency clock has stabilized.
SET LD LD LDW DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 1 (Switches the main system clock to the low-frequency clock) CLR (SYSCR2). 7 ; SYSCR2 0 (Turns off high-frequency oscillation) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRE). 5 (SYSCR2). 6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H ; SYSCR2 1 ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fs for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time (Depend on oscillator accompanied) ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 28
TMP86CS28FG
(2)
Switching from SLOW1 mode to NORMAL2 mode First, set SYSCR2 to turn on the high-frequency oscillation. When time for stabilization (Warm up) has been taken by the timer/counter (TC4,TC3), clear SYSCR2 to switch the main system clock to the high-frequency clock. SLOW mode can also be released by inputting low level on the RESET pin. After releasing reset, the operation mode is started from NORMAL1 mode.
Note: After SYSCK is cleared to "0", executing the instructions is continiued by the low-frequency clock for the period synchronized with low-frequency and high-frequency clocks.
High-frequency clock Low-frequency clock Main system clock SYSCK
Example :Switching from the SLOW1 mode to the NORMAL2 mode (fc = 16 MHz, warm-up time is 4.0 ms).
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR (TC4CR). 3 (SYSCR2). 5 ; Stops TC4, 3 ; SYSCR2 0 (Switches the main system clock to the high-frequency clock) RETI : VINTTC4: DW PINTTC4 ; INTTC4 vector table (TC4CR). 3 (EIRE). 5 (SYSCR2). 7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG4), 0F8H ; SYSCR2 1 (Starts high-frequency oscillation) ; Sets mode for TC4, 3 (16-bit mode, fc for source) ; Sets warming-up counter mode ; Sets warm-up time ; IMF 0 ; Enables INTTC4 ; IMF 1 ; Starts TC4, 3
Page 29
2.2 System Clock Controller
2. Operational Description
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock Turn off
SYSCK
XEN CLR (SYSCR2). 7 SLOW2 mode (a) Switching to the SLOW mode
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 5
NORMAL2 mode
SLOW1 mode
Figure 2-14 Switching between the NORMAL2 and SLOW Modes
Page 30
CLR (SYSCR2). 5 Warm up during SLOW2 mode (b) Switching to the NORMAL2 mode
Highfrequency clock Lowfrequency clock Main system clock
SYSCK
XEN
Instruction execution
SET (SYSCR2). 7
TMP86CS28FG
SLOW1 mode
NORMAL2 mode
TMP86CS28FG
2.3 Reset Circuit
The TMP86CS28FG has four types of reset generation procedures: An external reset input, an address trap reset, a watchdog timer reset and a system clock reset. Of these reset, the address trap reset, the watchdog timer and the system clock reset are a malfunction reset. When the malfunction reset request is detected, reset occurs during the maximum 24/fc[s]. The malfunction reset circuit such as watchdog timer reset, address trap reset and system clock reset is not initialized when power is turned on. Therefore, reset may occur during maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz) when power is turned on. Table 2-3 shows on-chip hardware initialization by reset action. Table 2-3 Initializing Internal Status by Reset Action
On-chip Hardware Program counter Stack pointer General-purpose registers (W, A, B, C, D, E, H, L, IX, IY) Jump status flag Zero flag Carry flag Half carry flag Sign flag Overflow flag Interrupt master enable flag Interrupt individual enable flags Interrupt latches (JF) (ZF) (CF) (HF) (SF) (VF) (IMF) (EF) (IL) (PC) (SP) Initial Value (FFFEH) Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Not initialized Output latches of I/O ports Not initialized Not initialized 0 0 Control registers 0 LCD data buffer RAM Refer to each of control register Not initialized Not initialized Refer to I/O port circuitry Watchdog timer Enable Prescaler and divider of timing generator 0 On-chip Hardware Initial Value
2.3.1
External Reset Input
The RESET pin contains a Schmitt trigger (Hysteresis) with an internal pull-up resistor. When the RESET pin is held at "L" level for at least 3 machine cycles (12/fc [s]) with the power supply voltage within the operating voltage range and oscillation stable, a reset is applied and the internal state is initialized. When the RESET pin input goes high, the reset operation is released and the program execution starts at the vector address stored at addresses FFFEH to FFFFH.
VDD
RESET
Internal reset Watchdog timer reset Malfunction reset output circuit Address trap reset System clock reset
Figure 2-15 Reset Circuit
Page 31
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86CS28FG
2.3.2
Address trap reset
If the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (when WDTCR1 is set to "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. The reset time is maximum 24/fc[s] (1.5s at 16.0 MHz).
Note:The operating mode under address trapped is alternative of reset or interrupt. The address trap area is alternative.
Instruction execution Internal reset
JP a Address trap is occurred
Reset release
Instruction at address r
maximum 24/fc [s]
4/fc to 12/fc [s]
16/fc [s]
Note 1: Address "a" is in the SFR, DBR or on-chip RAM (WDTCR1 = "1") space. Note 2: During reset release, reset vector "r" is read out, and an instruction at address "r" is fetched and decoded.
Figure 2-16 Address Trap Reset 2.3.3 Watchdog timer reset
Refer to Section "Watchdog Timer".
2.3.4
System clock reset
If the condition as follows is detected, the system clock reset occurs automatically to prevent dead lock of the CPU. (The oscillation is continued without stopping.) - In case of clearing SYSCR2 and SYSCR2 simultaneously to "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "0". - In case of clearing SYSCR2 to "0", when the SYSCR2 is "1". The reset time is maximum 24/fc (1.5 s at 16.0 MHz).
Page 32
TMP86CS28FG
Page 33
2. Operational Description
2.3 Reset Circuit TMP86CS28FG
Page 34
TMP86CS28FG
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
The TMP86CS28FG has a total of 23 interrupt sources excluding reset. Interrupts can be nested with priorities. Four of the internal interrupt sources are non-maskable while the rest are maskable. Interrupt sources are provided with interrupt latches (IL), which hold interrupt requests, and independent vectors. The interrupt latch is set to "1" by the generation of its interrupt request which requests the CPU to accept its interrupts. Interrupts are enabled or disabled by software using the interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and interrupt enable flag (EF). If more than one interrupts are generated simultaneously, interrupts are accepted in order which is dominated by hardware. However, there are no prioritized interrupt factors among non-maskable interrupts.
Interrupt Latch - - - IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9 IL10 IL11 IL12 IL13 IL14 IL15 IL16 IL17 IL18 IL19 IL20 IL21 IL22 IL23 IL24 IL25 IL26 IL27 IL28 IL29 IL30 IL31 Vector Address FFFE FFFC FFFC FFFA FFF8 FFF6 FFF4 FFF2 FFF0 FFEE FFEC FFEA FFE8 FFE6 FFE4 FFE2 FFE0 FFBE FFBC FFBA FFB8 FFB6 FFB4 FFB2 FFB0 FFAE FFAC FFAA FFA8 FFA6 FFA4 FFA2 FFA0
Interrupt Factors Internal/External Internal Internal Internal Internal External External Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal External Internal Internal Internal External Internal Internal External External Internal Internal Internal (Reset) INTSWI (Software interrupt) INTUNDEF (Executed the undefined instruction interrupt) INTATRAP (Address trap interrupt) INTWDT (Watchdog timer interrupt)
INT0
Enable Condition Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable Non-maskable IMF* EF4 = 1, INT0EN = 1 IMF* EF5 = 1 IMF* EF6 = 1 IMF* EF7 = 1 IMF* EF8 = 1 IMF* EF9 = 1 IMF* EF10 = 1 IMF* EF11 = 1 IMF* EF12 = 1 IMF* EF13 = 1 IMF* EF14 = 1 IMF* EF15 = 1 IMF* EF16 = 1 IMF* EF17 = 1 IMF* EF18 = 1 IMF* EF19 = 1 IMF* EF20 = 1 IMF* EF21 = 1 IMF* EF22 = 1 IMF* EF23 = 1 IMF* EF24 = 1 IMF* EF25 = 1 IMF* EF26 = 1 IMF* EF27 = 1 IMF* EF28 = 1 IMF* EF29 = 1 IMF* EF30 = 1 IMF* EF31 = 1
Priority 1 2 2 2 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
INT1 INTTBT INTTC10 INTRXD0 INTTXD0 INTTC11 INT2 Reserved INTSIO Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved INTTC3 INTTC4 INT3 INTTC5 INTTC6 INT4
INT5
INTRXD1 INTTXD1 INTADC Reserved Reserved
Note 1: To use the address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "reset request" after reset is cancelled). For details, see "Address Trap". Note 2: To use the watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT), clear WDTCR1 to "0" (It is set for the "Reset request" after reset is released). For details, see "Watchdog Timer".
Page 35
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL30 to IL2) TMP86CS28FG
3.1 Interrupt latches (IL30 to IL2)
An interrupt latch is provided for each interrupt source, except for a software interrupt and an executed the undefined instruction interrupt. When interrupt request is generated, the latch is set to "1", and the CPU is requested to accept the interrupt if its interrupt is enabled. The interrupt latch is cleared to "0" immediately after accepting interrupt. All interrupt latches are initialized to "0" during reset. The interrupt latches are located on address 002EH, 002FH, 003CH and 003DH in SFR area. Each latch can be cleared to "0" individually by instruction. However, IL2 and IL3 should not be cleared to "0" by software. For clearing the interrupt latch, load instruction should be used and then IL2 and IL3 should be set to "1". If the read-modifywrite instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions are used, interrupt request would be cleared inadequately if interrupt is requested while such instructions are executed. Interrupt latches are not set to "1" by an instruction. Since interrupt latches can be read, the status for interrupt requests can be monitored by software.
Note: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Clears interrupt latches
DI LDW EI (ILL), 1110100000111111B ; IMF 0 ; IL12, IL10 to IL6 0 ; IMF 1
Example 2 :Reads interrupt latchess
LD WA, (ILL) ; W ILH, A ILL
Example 3 :Tests interrupt latches
TEST JR (ILL). 7 F, SSET ; if IL7 = 1 then jump
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR)
The interrupt enable register (EIR) enables and disables the acceptance of interrupts, except for the non-maskable interrupts (Software interrupt, undefined instruction interrupt, address trap interrupt and watchdog interrupt). Nonmaskable interrupt is accepted regardless of the contents of the EIR. The EIR consists of an interrupt master enable flag (IMF) and the individual interrupt enable flags (EF). These registers are located on address 002CH, 002DH, 003AH and 003BH in SFR area, and they can be read and written by an instructions (Including read-modify-write instructions such as bit manipulation or operation instructions).
3.2.1
Interrupt master enable flag (IMF)
The interrupt enable register (IMF) enables and disables the acceptance of the whole maskable interrupt. While IMF = "0", all maskable interrupts are not accepted regardless of the status on each individual interrupt enable flag (EF). By setting IMF to "1", the interrupt becomes acceptable if the individuals are enabled. When an interrupt is accepted, IMF is cleared to "0" after the latest status on IMF is stacked. Thus the maskable interrupts which follow are disabled. By executing return interrupt instruction [RETI/RETN], the stacked data, which was the status before interrupt acceptance, is loaded on IMF again. The IMF is located on bit0 in EIRL (Address: 003AH in SFR), and can be read and written by an instruction. The IMF is normally set and cleared by [EI] and [DI] instruction respectively. During reset, the IMF is initialized to "0". Page 36
TMP86CS28FG
3.2.2
Individual interrupt enable flags (EF30 to EF4)
Each of these flags enables and disables the acceptance of its maskable interrupt. Setting the corresponding bit of an individual interrupt enable flag to "1" enables acceptance of its interrupt, and setting the bit to "0" disables acceptance. During reset, all the individual interrupt enable flags (EF30 to EF4) are initialized to "0" and all maskable interrupts are not accepted until they are set to "1".
Note:In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Example 1 :Enables interrupts individually and sets IMF
DI LDW : : EI ; IMF 1 (EIRL), 1110100010100000B ; IMF 0 ; EF15 to EF13, EF11, EF7, EF5 1 Note: IMF should not be set.
Example 2 :C compiler description example
unsigned int _io (3AH) EIRL; _DI(); EIRL = 10100000B; : _EI(); /* 3AH shows EIRL address */
Page 37
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.2 Interrupt enable register (EIR) TMP86CS28FG
Interrupt Latches
(Initial value: **0*0000 000000**) ILH,ILL (003DH, 003CH) 15 - 14 - 13 IL13 12 - 11 IL11 10 IL10 9 IL9 8 IL8 7 IL7 6 IL6 5 IL5 4 IL4 3 IL3 2 IL2 1 0
ILH (003DH)
ILL (003CH)
(Initial value: **000000 0000****) ILD,ILE (002FH, 002EH) 15 - 14 - 13 IL29 12 IL28 11 IL27 10 IL26 9 IL25 8 IL24 7 IL23 6 IL22 5 IL21 4 IL20 3 - 2 - 1 - 0 -
ILD (002FH)
ILE (002EH)
IL30 to IL2
Interrupt latches
at RD 0: No interrupt request 1: Interrupt request
at WR 0: Clears the interrupt request 1: (Interrupt latch is not set.)
R/W
Note 1: To clear any one of bits IL7 to IL4, be sure to write "1" into IL2 and IL3. Note 2: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1". Note 3: Do not clear IL with read-modify-write instructions such as bit operations.
Interrupt Enable Registers
(Initial value: **0*0000 0000***0) EIRH,EIRL (003BH, 003AH) 15 - 14 - 13 EF13 12 - 11 EF11 10 EF10 9 EF9 8 EF8 7 EF7 6 EF6 5 EF5 4 EF4 EIRL (003AH) 3 2 1 0 IMF
EIRH (003BH)
(Initial value: **000000 0000****) EIRD,EIRE (002DH, 002CH) 15 - 14 - 13 EF29 12 EF28 11 EF27 10 EF26 9 EF25 8 EF24 7 EF23 6 EF22 5 EF21 4 EF20 3 - 2 - 1 - 0 -
EIRD (002DH)
EIRE (002CH)
EF30 to EF4 IMF
Individual-interrupt enable flag (Specified for each bit) Interrupt master enable flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Disables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Enables the acceptance of each maskable interrupt. Disables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts Enables the acceptance of all maskable interrupts
R/W
Note 1: *: Don't care Note 2: Do not set IMF and the interrupt enable flag (EF15 to EF4) to "1" at the same time. Note 3: In main program, before manipulating the interrupt enable flag (EF) or the interrupt latch (IL), be sure to clear IMF to "0" (Disable interrupt by DI instruction). Then set IMF newly again as required after operating on the EF or IL (Enable interrupt by EI instruction) In interrupt service routine, because the IMF becomes "0" automatically, clearing IMF need not execute normally on interrupt service routine. However, if using multiple interrupt on interrupt service routine, manipulating EF or IL should be executed before setting IMF="1".
Page 38
TMP86CS28FG
3.3 Interrupt Sequence
An interrupt request, which raised interrupt latch, is held, until interrupt is accepted or interrupt latch is cleared to "0" by resetting or an instruction. Interrupt acceptance sequence requires 8 machine cycles (2 s @16 MHz) after the completion of the current instruction. The interrupt service task terminates upon execution of an interrupt return instruction [RETI] (for maskable interrupts) or [RETN] (for non-maskable interrupts). Figure 3-1 shows the timing chart of interrupt acceptance processing.
3.3.1
Interrupt acceptance processing is packaged as follows.
a. The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is cleared to "0" in order to disable the acceptance of any following interrupt. b. The interrupt latch (IL) for the interrupt source accepted is cleared to "0". c. The contents of the program counter (PC) and the program status word, including the interrupt master enable flag (IMF), are saved (Pushed) on the stack in sequence of PSW + IMF, PCH, PCL. Meanwhile, the stack pointer (SP) is decremented by 3. d. The entry address (Interrupt vector) of the corresponding interrupt service program, loaded on the vector table, is transferred to the program counter. e. The instruction stored at the entry address of the interrupt service program is executed.
Note:When the contents of PSW are saved on the stack, the contents of IMF are also saved.
1-machine cycle
Interrupt service task
Interrupt request Interrupt latch (IL)
IMF Execute instruction a-1 Execute instruction Execute instruction
Interrupt acceptance
Execute RETI instruction
PC
a
a+1
a
b
b+1 b+2 b + 3
c+1
c+2
a
a+1 a+2
SP
n
n-1 n-2
n-3
n-2 n-1
n
Note 1: a: Return address entry address, b: Entry address, c: Address which RETI instruction is stored Note 2: On condition that interrupt is enabled, it takes 38/fc [s] or 38/fs [s] at maximum (If the interrupt latch is set at the first machine cycle on 10 cycle instruction) to start interrupt acceptance processing since its interrupt latch is set.
Figure 3-1 Timing Chart of Interrupt Acceptance/Return Interrupt Instruction
Example: Correspondence between vector table address for INTTBT and the entry address of the interrupt service program
Vector table address
Entry address Interrupt service program
FFF2H FFF3H
03H D2H
Vector
D203H D204H
0FH 06H
Figure 3-2 Vector table address,Entry address
Page 39
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.3 Interrupt Sequence TMP86CS28FG
A maskable interrupt is not accepted until the IMF is set to "1" even if the maskable interrupt higher than the level of current servicing interrupt is requested. In order to utilize nested interrupt service, the IMF is set to "1" in the interrupt service program. In this case, acceptable interrupt sources are selectively enabled by the individual interrupt enable flags. To avoid overloaded nesting, clear the individual interrupt enable flag whose interrupt is currently serviced, before setting IMF to "1". As for non-maskable interrupt, keep interrupt service shorten compared with length between interrupt requests; otherwise the status cannot be recovered as non-maskable interrupt would simply nested.
3.3.2
Saving/restoring general-purpose registers
During interrupt acceptance processing, the program counter (PC) and the program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are automatically saved on the stack, but the accumulator and others are not. These registers are saved by software if necessary. When multiple interrupt services are nested, it is also necessary to avoid using the same data memory area for saving registers. The following methods are used to save/restore the generalpurpose registers.
3.3.2.1
Using PUSH and POP instructions
If only a specific register is saved or interrupts of the same source are nested, general-purpose registers can be saved/restored using the PUSH/POP instructions.
Example :Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
PINTxx: PUSH WA ; Save WA register (interrupt processing) POP RETI WA ; Restore WA register ; RETURN
Address (Example) SP A SP PCL PCH PSW At acceptance of an interrupt W PCL PCH PSW At execution of PUSH instruction SP PCL PCH PSW At execution of POP instruction SP b-5 b-4 b-3 b-2 b-1 b At execution of RETI instruction
Figure 3-3 Save/store register using PUSH and POP instructions
3.3.2.2 Using data transfer instructions
To save only a specific register without nested interrupts, data transfer instructions are available.
Page 40
TMP86CS28FG
Example :Save/store register using data transfer instructions
PINTxx: LD (GSAVA), A ; Save A register (interrupt processing) LD RETI A, (GSAVA) ; Restore A register ; RETURN
Main task Interrupt acceptance Interrupt service task Saving registers
Restoring registers Interrupt return Saving/Restoring general-purpose registers using PUSH/POP data transfer instruction
Figure 3-4 Saving/Restoring General-purpose Registers under Interrupt Processing 3.3.3 Interrupt return
Interrupt return instructions [RETI]/[RETN] perform as follows.
[RETI]/[RETN] Interrupt Return 1. Program counter (PC) and program status word (PSW, includes IMF) are restored from the stack. 2. Stack pointer (SP) is incremented by 3.
As for address trap interrupt (INTATRAP), it is required to alter stacked data for program counter (PC) to restarting address, during interrupt service program.
Note:If [RETN] is executed with the above data unaltered, the program returns to the address trap area and INTATRAP occurs again.When interrupt acceptance processing has completed, stacked data for PCL and PCH are located on address (SP + 1) and (SP + 2) respectively.
Example 1 :Returning from address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) service program
PINTxx: POP LD PUSH WA WA, Return Address WA ; Recover SP by 2 ; ; Alter stacked data
(interrupt processing) RETN ; RETURN
Page 41
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW) TMP86CS28FG
Example 2 :Restarting without returning interrupt (In this case, PSW (Includes IMF) before interrupt acceptance is discarded.)
PINTxx: INC INC INC SP SP SP ; Recover SP by 3 ; ;
(interrupt processing) LD JP EIRL, data Restart Address ; Set IMF to "1" or clear it to "0" ; Jump into restarting address
Interrupt requests are sampled during the final cycle of the instruction being executed. Thus, the next interrupt can be accepted immediately after the interrupt return instruction is executed.
Note 1: It is recommended that stack pointer be return to rate before INTATRAP (Increment 3 times), if return interrupt instruction [RETN] is not utilized during interrupt service program under INTATRAP (such as Example 2). Note 2: When the interrupt processing time is longer than the interrupt request generation time, the interrupt service task is performed but not the main task.
3.4 Software Interrupt (INTSW)
Executing the SWI instruction generates a software interrupt and immediately starts interrupt processing (INTSW is highest prioritized interrupt). Use the SWI instruction only for detection of the address error or for debugging.
3.4.1
Address error detection
FFH is read if for some cause such as noise the CPU attempts to fetch an instruction from a non-existent memory address during single chip mode. Code FFH is the SWI instruction, so a software interrupt is generated and an address error is detected. The address error detection range can be further expanded by writing FFH to unused areas of the program memory. Address trap reset is generated in case that an instruction is fetched from RAM, DBR or SFR areas.
3.4.2
Debugging
Debugging efficiency can be increased by placing the SWI instruction at the software break point setting address.
3.5 Undefined Instruction Interrupt (INTUNDEF)
Taking code which is not defined as authorized instruction for instruction causes INTUNDEF. INTUNDEF is generated when the CPU fetches such a code and tries to execute it. INTUNDEF is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTUNDEF interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The undefined instruction interrupt (INTUNDEF) forces CPU to jump into vector address, as software interrupt (SWI) does.
3.6 Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
Fetching instruction from unauthorized area for instructions (Address trapped area) causes reset output or address trap interrupt (INTATRAP). INTATRAP is accepted even if non-maskable interrupt is in process. Contemporary process is broken and INTATRAP interrupt process starts, soon after it is requested.
Note: The operating mode under address trapped, whether to be reset output or interrupt processing, is selected on watchdog timer control register (WDTCR).
Page 42
TMP86CS28FG
3.7 External Interrupts
The TMP86CS28FG has 6 external interrupt inputs. These inputs are equipped with digital noise reject circuits (Pulse inputs of less than a certain time are eliminated as noise). Edge selection is also possible with INT1 to INT4. The INT0/P30 pin can be configured as either an external interrupt input pin or an input/output port, and is configured as an input port during reset. Edge selection, noise reject control and INT0/P30 pin function selection are performed by the external interrupt control register (EINTCR).
Source Pin Enable Conditions Release Edge (level) Digital Noise Reject Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 15/fc or 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 49/fc or 193/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 7/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 25/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals. Pulses of less than 2/fc [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 7/fc [s] or more are considered to be signals. In the SLOW or the SLEEP mode, pulses of less than 1/fs [s] are eliminated as noise. Pulses of 3.5/fs [s] or more are considered to be signals.
INT0
INT0
IMF
EF4
INT0EN=1
Falling edge
INT1
INT1
IMF
EF5 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT2
INT2
IMF
EF11 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT3
INT3
IMF
EF22 = 1
Falling edge or Rising edge
INT4
INT4
IMF
EF25 = 1
Falling edge, Rising edge, Falling and Rising edge or H level
INT5
INT5
IMF
EF26 = 1
Falling edge
Note 1: In NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, if a signal with no noise is input on an external interrupt pin, it takes a maximum of "signal establishment time + 6/fs[s]" from the input signal's edge to set the interrupt latch. Note 2: When INT0EN = "0", IL4 is not set even if a falling edge is detected on the INT0 pin input. Note 3: When a pin with more than one function is used as an output and a change occurs in data or input/output status, an interrupt request signal is generated in a pseudo manner. In this case, it is necessary to perform appropriate processing such as disabling the interrupt enable flag.
Page 43
3. Interrupt Control Circuit
3.7 External Interrupts TMP86CS28FG
External Interrupt Control Register
EINTCR (0037H) 7 INT1NC 6 INT0EN 5 INT4ES 4 3 INT3ES 2 INT2ES 1 INT1ES 0 (Initial value: 0000 000*)
INT1NC INT0EN
Noise reject time select P30/INT0 pin configuration
0: Pulses of less than 63/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 1: Pulses of less than 15/fc [s] are eliminated as noise 0: P30 input/output port 1: INT0 pin (Port P30 should be set to an input mode) 00: Rising edge 01: Falling edge 10: Rising edge and Falling edge 11: H level 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge 0: Rising edge 1: Falling edge
R/W R/W
INT4 ES
INT4 edge select
R/W
INT3 ES INT2 ES INT1 ES
INT3 edge select INT2 edge select INT1 edge select
R/W R/W R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 2: When the system clock frequency is switched between high and low or when the external interrupt control register (EINTCR) is overwritten, the noise canceller may not operate normally. It is recommended that external interrupts are disabled using the interrupt enable register (EIR). Note 3: The maximum time from modifying INT1NC until a noise reject time is changed is 26/fc. Note 4: In case RESET pin is released while the state of INT4 pin keeps "H" level, the external interrupt 4 request is not generated even if the INT4 edge select is specified as "H" level. The rising edge is needed after RESET pin is released.
Page 44
TMP86CS28FG
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
The TMP86CS28FG adopts the memory mapped I/O system, and all peripheral control and data transfers are performed through the special function register (SFR) or the data buffer register (DBR). The SFR is mapped on address 0000H to 003FH, DBR is mapped on address 0F00H to 0FFFH. This chapter shows the arrangement of the special function register (SFR) and data buffer register (DBR) for TMP86CS28FG.
4.1 SFR
Address 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H 0009H 000AH 000BH 000CH 000DH 000EH 000FH 0010H 0011H 0012H 0013H 0014H 0015H 0016H 0017H 0018H 0019H 001AH 001BH 001CH 001DH 001EH 001FH 0020H 0021H 0022H 0023H 0024H 0025H Read P0DR P1DR P2DR P3DR P4DR P5DR P6DR P7DR P8DR TC3CR TC4CR TC5CR TC6CR Reserved Reserved Reserved TC10DRAL TC10DRAH TC10DRBL TC10DRBH TC10CR TTREG3 TTREG4 TTREG5 TTREG6 PWREG3 PWREG4 PWREG5 PWREG6 Reserved Reserved Reserved TC11DRAL TC11DRAH TC11DRBL TC11DRBH TC11CR Reserved Write
Page 45
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.1 SFR TMP86CS28FG
Address 0026H 0027H 0028H 0029H 002AH 002BH 002CH 002DH 002EH 002FH 0030H 0031H 0032H 0033H 0034H 0035H 0036H 0037H 0038H 0039H 003AH 003BH 003CH 003DH 003EH 003FH
Read Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved P3OUTCR EIRE EIRD ILE ILD Reserved P0OUTCR Reserved TBTCR EINTCR SYSCR1 SYSCR2 EIRL EIRH ILL ILH Reserved PSW
Write
STOPCR
WDTCR1 WDTCR2
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 46
TMP86CS28FG
4.2 DBR
Address 0F00H :: 0F5FH Read Reserved :: Reserved Write
Address 0F60H 0F61H 0F62H 0F63H 0F64H 0F65H 0F66H 0F67H 0F68H 0F69H
Read SIOBR0 SIOBR1 SIOBR2 SIOBR3 SIOBR4 SIOBR5 SIOBR6 SIOBR7 SIOSR
Write
SIOCR1 SIOCR2
Address 0F70H :: 0F7FH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Page 47
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86CS28FG
Address 0F80H :: 0F9FH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Address 0FA0H :: 0FBFH
Read Reserved :: Reserved
Write
Address 0FC0H 0FC1H 0FC2H 0FC3H 0FC4H 0FC5H 0FC6H 0FC7H 0FC8H 0FC9H 0FCAH 0FCBH 0FCCH 0FCDH 0FCEH 0FCFH 0FD0H 0FD1H 0FD2H 0FD3H 0FD4H 0FD5H 0FD6H 0FD7H 0FD8H 0FD9H 0FDAH 0FDBH 0FDCH 0FDDH 0FDEH 0FDFH
Read SEG1/0 SEG3/2 SEG5/4 SEG7/6 SEG9/8 SEG11/10 SEG13/12 SEG15/14 SEG17/16 SEG19/18 SEG21/20 SEG23/22 SEG25/24 SEG27/26 SEG29/28 SEG31/30 SEG33/32 SEG35/34 SEG37/36 SEG39/38 P4LCR P5LCR P6LCR P7LCR P8LCR LCDCR Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Write
Page 48
TMP86CS28FG
Address 0FE0H 0FE1H 0FE2H 0FE3H 0FE4H 0FE5H 0FE6H 0FE7H 0FE8H 0FE9H 0FEAH 0FEBH 0FECH 0FEDH 0FEEH 0FEFH 0FF0H 0FF1H 0FF2H 0FF3H 0FF4H 0FF5H 0FF6H 0FF7H 0FF8H 0FF9H 0FFAH 0FFBH 0FFCH 0FFDH 0FFEH 0FFFH
Read ADCDR2 ADCDR1 ADCCR1 ADCCR2 Reserved UART0SR RD0BUF UART1SR RD1BUF Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved P0PRD Reserved P2PRD P3PRD P4PRD P5PRD P6PRD P7PRD P8PRD P1CR1 P1CR2 P4OUTCR P5OUTCR P6OUTCR P7OUTCR P8OUTCR
Write -
UART0CR1 UART0CR2 TD0BUF UART1CR1 UART1CR2 TD1BUF
-
-
Note 1: Do not access reserved areas by the program. Note 2: - ; Cannot be accessed. Note 3: Write-only registers and interrupt latches cannot use the read-modify-write instructions (Bit manipulation instructions such as SET, CLR, etc. and logical operation instructions such as AND, OR, etc.).
Page 49
4. Special Function Register (SFR)
4.2 DBR TMP86CS28FG
Page 50
TMP86CS28FG
5. I/O Ports
The TMP86CS28FG has 9 input/output ports (62 pins) as shown below. Table 5-1
Port Functions
Primary Function Port P0 Port P1 Port P2 3-bit input/output port 8-bit input/output port 3-bit input/output port Secondary Functions External interrupt input, PPG output Analog input, STOP mode release signal input External interrupt input, low-frequency resonator connection, STOP mode release signal input External interrupt input, timer/counter input, serial interface input/output, UART input/output, divider output External interrupt input, timer/counter input, LCD segment output, PPG output Timer/counter input/output, LCD segment output, UART input/output LCD segment output LCD segment output LCD segment output
Port P3 Port P4 Port P5 Port P6 Port P7 Port P8
8-bit input/output port 8-bit input/output port 8-bit input/output port 8-bit input/output port 8-bit input/output port 8-bit input/output port
Table 5-2
Port P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8
Register List
Read P0PRD (0FF0H) - P2PRD (0FF2H) P3PRD (0FF3H) P4PRD (0FF4H) P5PRD (0FF5H) P6PRD (0FF6H) P7PRD (0FF7H) P8PRD (0FF8H) Pch Control P0OUTCR (0032H) - - P3OUTCR (002BH) P4OUTCR (0FFBH) P5OUTCR (0FFCH) P6OUTCR (0FFDH) P7OUTCR (0FFEH) P8OUTCR (0FFFH) CR1 - P1CR1 (0FF9H) - - - - - - - CR2 - P1CR2 (0FFAH) - - - - - - - LCD Control - - - - P4LCR (0FD4H) P5LCR (0FD5H) P6LCR (0FD6H) P7LCR (0FD7H) P8LCR (0FD8H) P0DR (0000H)
Latch
P1DR (0001H) P2DR (0002H) P3DR (0003H) P4DR (0004H) P5DR (0005H) P6DR (0006H) P7DR (0007H) P8DR (0008H)
Page 51
5. I/O Ports
TMP86CS28FG
Each output port contains a latch for holding output data. All input ports do not have latches, making it necessary to externally hold input data until it is read externally or to read input data multiple times before it is processed. Figure 5-1 shows input/output timings. External data is read from an input/output port in the S1 state of the read cycle in instruction execution. Since this timing cannot be recognized externally, transient input such as chattering must be processed by software. Data is output to an input/output port in the S2 state of the write cycle in instruction execution.
Fetch cycle Instruction execution cycle Input strobe Fetch cycle Read cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 S1 S2 S3 Ex: LD A, (x)
Data input (a) Input timing Fetch cycle Instruction execution cycle Output latch pulse Fetch cycle Write cycle
S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 S1 S2 S3 S0 S1 S2 S3 Ex: LD (x), A
Data output (b) Output timing
Note: The positions of the read and write cycles may vary depending on the instruction.
Figure 5-1 Input/Output Timings (Example)
Page 52
TMP86CS28FG
5.1 Port P0 (P00 to P02)
Port P0 is a 3-bit input/output port that can also be used for external interrupt input or PPG output. A reset initializes the output latch (P0DR) to "1" and the Pch control (P0OUTCR) to "0". To use a pin in Port P0 as an input port or external interrupt input, set P0DR to "1" and then set the corresponding bit in P0OUTCR to "0". To use a pin in Port P0 as a PPG output, set P0DR to "1". The output circuit of Port P0 can be set either as sink open-drain output ("0") or CMOS output ("1") individually for each bit in P0OUTCR. Port P0 has a separate data input register. The output latch state can be read from the P0DR register, and the pin state can be read from the P0PRD register. Table 5-3 Register Programming for Port P0 (P00 to P02)
Programmed Value Function P0DR Port input, external interrupt input Port "0" output Port "1" output, PPG output "1" "0" "1" P0OUTCR "0" Set as appropriate.
STOP OUTEN P0OUTCRi P0OUTCRi input Data input (P0PRD) Output latch read (P0DR) Data output (P0DR) Control output Control input D Q
P0i Note) i = 2~0
D
Q
Output latch
Figure 5-2 Port P0
Page 53
5. I/O Ports
5.1 Port P0 (P00 to P02) TMP86CS28FG
P0DR (0000H) R/W P0OUTCR (0032H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2 P02
PPG1
1 P01
0 P00 (Initial value: **** *111)
INT3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** *000)
P0OUTCR
Port P0 input/output control (set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: CMOS output
R/W
P0PRD (0FF0H) Read only
7
6
5
4
3
2 P02
1 P01
0 P00 (Initial value: **** *000)
Page 54
TMP86CS28FG
5.2 Port P1 (P10 to P17)
Port P1 is an 8-bit input/output port that can be configured as an input or an output on a bit basis. Port P1 is also used for analog input or key-on wake-up input. The Port P1 input/output control register (P1CR1) and Port P1 input control register (P1CR2) are used to specify the function of each pin. A reset initializes P1CR1 to "0", P1CR2 to "1", and the output latch (P1DR) to "0" so that Port P1 becomes an input port. To use a pin in Port P1 as an input port, set P1CR1 to "0" and then set P1CR2 to "1". To use a pin in Port P1 as an analog input or key-on wake-up input, set P1CR1 to "0" and then set P1CR2 to "0". To use a pin in Port P1 as an output port, set the corresponding bit in P1CR1 to "1". To read the output latch data, set P1CR1 to "1"and read P1DR. To read the pin state, set P1CR1 to "0" and P1CR2 to "1" and then read P1DR. When P1CR1 = "0" and P1CR2 = "0", P1DR is read as "0". Bits not used as analog inputs are used as input/output pins. During AD conversion, however, output instructions must not be executed to ensure the accuracy of conversion results. Also, during AD conversion, do not input signals that fluctuate widely to pins near analog input pins. Table 5-4 Register Programming for Port P1 (P10 to P17)
Programmed Value Function P1DR Port input Analog input, key-on wake-up input Port "0" output Port "1" output * * "0" "1" P1CR1 "0" "0" "1" "1" P1CR2 "1" "0" * *
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that either "1" or "0" can be set.
Table 5-5 Values Read from P1DR according to Register Programming
Conditions Values Read from P1DR P1CR1 "0" "0" "1" "1" P1CR2 "0" "1" "0" Output latch state "0" Pin state
Page 55
5. I/O Ports
5.2 Port P1 (P10 to P17) TMP86CS28FG
Analog input AINDS SAIN P CR2i P1CR2i input P1CR1i P1CR1i input Data input (P1DR) D Q D Q
Data output (P1DR) STOP OUTEN STOPk Key-on wake-up Analog input AINDS SAIN P1CR2j P1CR2j input P1CR1j P1CR1j input Data input (P1DR)
D
Q
P1i Note 1) i = 0, 1, 6, 7 : j = 2~5 : k = 2~5 Note 2) STOP = bit 7 in SYSCR1 Note 3) SAIN = AD input select signal Note 4) STOPk = input select signal for key-on wake-up
D
Q
D
Q
Data output (P1DR) STOP OUTEN
D
Q
P1j
Figure 5-3 Port P1
Note 1: Pins set to input mode read the pin input data. Therefore, when both input and output modes are used in Port P1, the contents of the output latch of a pin set to input mode may be overwritten by a bit manipulation instruction. Note 2: For a pin used as an analog input, be sure to clear the corresponding bit in P1CR2 to "0" to prevent flow-through current. Note 3: For a pin used as an analog input, do not set P1CR1 to "1" (port output) to prevent the pin from becoming shorted with an external signal. Note 4: Pins not used as analog inputs can be used as input/output pins. During AD conversion, however, output instructions must not be executed to ensure the accuracy of conversion results. Also, during AD conversion, do not input signals that fluctuate widely to pins near analog input pins.
Page 56
TMP86CS28FG
P1DR (0001H) R/W P1CR1 (0FF9H)
7 P17 AIN7 7
6 P16 AIN6 6
5 P15 AIN5 STOP5 5
4 P14 AIN4 STOP4 4
3 P13 AIN3 STOP3 3
2 P12 AIN2 STOP2 2
1 P11 AIN1 1
0 P10 AIN0 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P1CR1
Port P1 input/output control (set for each bit individually)
0: Port input, key-on wake-up input, analog input 1: Port output
R/W
P1CR2 (0FFAH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
P1CR2
Port P1 input control (set for each bit individually)
0: Analog input, key-on wake-up input 1: Port input
R/W
Page 57
5. I/O Ports
5.3 Port P2 (P20 to P22) TMP86CS28FG
5.3 Port P2 (P20 to P22)
Port P2 is a 3-bit input/output port that can also be used for external interrupt input, STOP mode release signal input, or low-frequency resonator connection. To use Port P2 as an input port or function pins, set the output latch (P2DR) to "1". A reset initializes P2DR to "1". In the dual clock mode, pins P21 (XTIN) and P22 (XOUT) are connected with a low-frequency resonator (32.768 kHz). In the single clock mode, pins P21 and P22 can be used as normal input/output port pins. It is recommended that pin P20 be used as an external interrupt input, STOP release signal input, or input port. (When P20 is used as an output port, the interrupt latch is set on the falling edge of the output pulse.) Port P2 has a separate data input register. The output latch state can be read from the P2DR register, and the pin state can be read from the P2PRD register. When a read instruction is executed on P2DR or P2PRD, bits 7 to 3 are read as undefined.
Data input (P20PRD) Data input (P20) Data output (P20) D Q P20 (INT5, STOP)
Output latch
Control input Data input (P21PRD) Output latch read (P21) Data output (P21) Data input (P22PRD) Output latch read (P22) Data output (P22) D Q P22 (XTOUT) D Q P21 (XTIN) Osc. enable
Output latch
Output latch
STOP OUTEN XTEN fs
Figure 5-4 Port P2
P2DR (0002H) R/W P2PRD (0FF2H) Read only
7
6
5
4
3
2 P22 XTOUT
1 P21 XTIN 1 P21
0 P20
INT5 STOP
(Initial value: **** *111)
7
6
5
4
3
2 P22
0 P20
Note: Since pin P20 is also used as a STOP pin, the output of P20 becomes high-impedance in STOP mode regardless of the OUTEN state.
Page 58
TMP86CS28FG
5.4 Port P3 (P30 to P37)
Port P3 is an 8-bit input/output port that can also be used for external interrupt input, divider output, timer/counter input, serial interface input/output, or UART input/output. A reset initializes the output latch (P3DR) to "1" and the Pch control (P3OUTCR) to "0". To use a pin in Port P3 as an external interrupt input, timer/counter input, serial interface input, or UART input, set P3DR to "1" and then set the corresponding bit in P3OUTCR to "0". To use a pin in Port P3 as a divider output, serial interface output, or UART output, set P3DR to "1". Port 3 can be used for either SIO or UART, so be sure not to enable both of these functions at the same time. The output circuit of Port P3 can be set either as sink open-drain output ("0") or CMOS output ("1") individually for each bit in P3OUTCR. Port P3 has a separate data input register. The output latch state can be read from the P3DR register, and the pin state can be read from the P3PRD register. Table 5-6 Register Programming for Port P3 (P30 to P37)
Programmed Value Function P3DR Port input, external interrupt input, timer/counter input, serial interface input, UART input Port "0" output Port "1" output, serial interface output, UART output, divider output "1" "0" "1" Set as appropriate. P3OUTCR "0"
STOP OUTEN P3OUTCRi P3OUTCRi input Data input (P3PRD) Output latch read (P3DR) Data output (P3DR) Control output Control input D Q
P3i Note) i = 7~0
D
Q
Output latch
Figure 5-5 Port P3
Page 59
5. I/O Ports
5.4 Port P3 (P30 to P37) TMP86CS28FG
P3DR (0003H) R/W P3OUTCR (002BH)
7 P37 TC10 INT4 7
6 P36
SCK
5 P35 SI TXD1 5
4 P34 SO RXD1 4
3 P33
2 P32
1 P31
DVO
0 P30
INT0
(Initial value: 1111 1111)
6
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P3OUTCR
Port P3 output circuit control (set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: CMOS output
R/W
P3PRD (0FF3H) Read only
7 P37
6 P36
5 P35
4 P34
3 P33
2 P32
1 P31
0 P30
Page 60
TMP86CS28FG
5.5 Port P4 (P40 to P47)
Port P4 is an 8-bit input/output port that can also be used for external interrupt input, PPG output, timer/counter input, or LCD segment output. A reset initializes the output latch (P4DR) to "1", the Pch control (P4OUTCR) to "0", and the LCD output control register (P4LCR) to "0". To use a pin in Port P4 as an input port, external interrupt input, or timer/counter input, set P4DR to "1" and then set the corresponding bit in P4LCR and P4OUTCR to "0". To use a pin in Port P4 as an LCD segment output, set the corresponding bit in P4LCR to "1". To use a pin in Port P4 as a PPG output, set P4DR to "1" and then set the corresponding bit in P4LCR to "0". The output circuit of Port P4 can be set either as sink open-drain outut ("0") or CMOS output ("1") individually for each bit in P4OUTCR. Port P4 has a separate data input register. The output latch state can be read from the P4DR register, and the pin state can be read from the P4PRD register. Table 5-7 Register Programming for Port P4 (P40 to P47)
Programmed Value Function P4DR Port input, external interrupt input, timer/counter input Port "0" output Port "1" output PPG output LCD segment output "1" "0" "1" "1" * * Set as appropriate. P4OUTCR "0" P4LCR "0" "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that either "1" or "0" can be set.
STOP OUTEN P4OUTCRi P4OUTCRi input P4LCRi input P4LCRi Data input (P4PRD) Output latch read (P4DR) Data output (P4DR) Control output Control input D Q
P4i Note) i = 7~0
D
Q
D
Q
Output latch
LCD data output
Figure 5-6 Port P4
Page 61
5. I/O Ports
5.5 Port P4 (P40 to P47) TMP86CS28FG
7 P4DR (0004H) R/W P47 SEG32
6 P46 SEG31
5 P45 SEG30
4 P44 SEG29
3 P43 SEG28 TC11
2 P42 SEG27
PPG1
1 P41 SEG26 INT2
0 P40 SEG25 INT1 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P4LCR (0FD4H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P4LCR
Port P4 segment output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Input/output port 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P4OUTCR (0FFBH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P4OUTCR
P4 output circuit control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: CMOS output
R/W
P4PRD (0FF4H) Read only
7 P47
6 P46
5 P45
4 P44
3 P43
2 P42
1 P41
0 P40
Page 62
TMP86CS28FG
5.6 Port P5 (P50 to P57)
Port P5 is an 8-bit input/output port that can also be used for timer/counter input/output, LCD segment output, or UART input/output. A reset initializes the output latch (P5DR) to "1", the Pch control (P5OUTCR) to "0", and the LCD output control register (P5LCR) to "0". To use a pin in Port P5 as an input port, timer/counter input, or UART input, set P5DR to "1" and then set the corresponding bit in P5LCR and P5OUTCR to "0". To use a pin in Port P5 as an LCD segment output, set the corresponding bit in P5LCR to "1". To use a pin in Port P5 as a UART output or timer/counter output, set P5DR to "1" and then set the corresponding bit in P5LCR to "0". The output circuit of Port P5 can be set either as sink open-drain output ("0") or CMOS otuput ("1") individually for each bit in P5OUTCR. Port P5 has a separate data input register. The output latch state can be read from the P5DR register, and the pin state can be read from the P5PRD register. Table 5-8 Register Programming for Port P5 (P50 to P57)
Programmed Value Function P5DR Port input, UART input, timer/counter input Port "0" output Port "1" output, UART output LCD segment output "1" "0" "1" * P5OUTCR "0" Set as appropriate. * P5LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that either "1" or "0" can be set.
STOP OUTEN P5OUTCRi P5OUTCRi input P5LCRi input P5LCRi Data input (P5PRD) Output latch read (P5DR) Data output (P5DR) Control output Control input D Q
P5i Note) i = 7~0
D
Q
D
Q
Output latch
LCD data output
Figure 5-7 Port P5
Page 63
5. I/O Ports
5.6 Port P5 (P50 to P57) TMP86CS28FG
7 P5DR (0005H) R/W P57 SEG24
6 P56 SEG25
5 P55 SEG26 TC6
PWM6 PDO6
4 P54 SEG27 TC5
PWM5 PDO5
3 P53 SEG28 TC4
PWM4 PDO4
2 P52 SEG29 TC3
PWM3 PDO3
1 P51 SEG30 RXD0
0 P50 SEG31 TXD0
(Initial value: 0000 0000)
P5LCR (0FD5H)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P5LCR
Port P5 segment output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Input/output port 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P5OUTCR (0FFCH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P5OUTCR
Port P5 input/output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: CMOS output
R/W
P5PRD (0FF5H) Read only
7 P57
6 P56
5 P55
4 P54
3 P53
2 P52
1 P51
0 P50
Page 64
TMP86CS28FG
5.7 Port P6 (P60 to P67)
Port P6 is an 8-bit input/output port that can also be used for LCD segment output. A reset initializes the output latch (P6DR) to "1", the Pch control (P6OUTCR) to "0", and the LCD output control register (P6LCR) to "0". To use a pin in Port P6 as an input port, set P6DR to "1" and then set the corresponding bit in P6LCR and P6OUTCR to "0". To use a pin in Port P6 as an LCD segment output, set the corresponding bit in P6LCR to "1". The output circuit of Port P6 can be set either as sink open-drain output ("0") or CMOS output ("1") individually for each bit in P6OUTCR. Port P6 has a separate data input register. The outut latch state can be read from the P6DR register, and the pin state can be read from the P6PRD register. Table 5-9 Register Programming for Port P6 (P60 to P67)
Programmed Value Function P6DR Port input Port "0" output Port "1" output LCD segment output "1" "0" "1" * P6OUTCR "0" Set as appropriate. * P6LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that either "1" or "0" can be set.
STOP OUTEN P6OUTCRi P6OUTCRi input P6LCRi input P6LCRi Data input (P6PRD) Output latch read (P6DR) Data output (P6DR) D Q
P6i Note) i = 7~0
D
Q
D
Q
Output latch
LCD data output
Figure 5-8 Port P6
Page 65
5. I/O Ports
5.7 Port P6 (P60 to P67) TMP86CS28FG
P6DR (0006H) R/W P6LCR (0FD6H)
7 P67 SEG16 7
6 P66 SEG17 6
5 P65 SEG18 5
4 P64 SEG19 4
3 P63 SEG20 3
2 P62 SEG21 2
1 P61 SEG22 1
0 P60 SEG23 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P6LCR
Port P6 segment output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Input/output port 1: Segment output
R/W
P6OUTCR (0FFDH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
P6CR2
Port P6 input/output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: CMOS output
R/W
P6PRD (0FF6H) Read only
7 P67
6 P66
5 P65
4 P64
3 P63
2 P62
1 P61
0 P60
Page 66
TMP86CS28FG
5.8 Port P7 (P70 to P77)
Port P7 is an 8-bit input/output port that can also be used for LCD segment output. A reset initializes the output latch (P7DR) to "1", the Pch control (P7OUTCR) to "0", and the LCD output control register (P7LCR) to "0". To use a pin in Port P7 as an input port, set P7DR to "1" and then set the corresponding bit in P7LCR and P7OUTCR to "0". To use a pin in Port P7 as an LCD segment output, set the corresponding bit in P7LCR to "1". The output circuit of Port P7 can be set either as sink open-drain output ("0") or CMOS output ("1") individually for each bit in P7OUTCR. Port P7 has a separate data input register. The output latch state can be read from the P7DR register, and the pin state can be read from the P7PRD register. Table 5-10 Register Programming for Port P7 (P70 to P77)
Programmed Value Function P7DR Port input Port "0" output Port "1" output LCD segment output "1" "0" "1" * P7OUTCR "0" Set as appropriate. * P7LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that either "1" or "0" can be set.
STOP OUTEN P7OUTCRi P7OUTCRi input P7LCRi input P7LCRi Data input (P7PRD) Output latch read (P7DR) Data output (P7DR) LCD data output D Q
P7i Note) i = 7~0
D
Q
D
Q
Output latch
Figure 5-9 Port P7
Page 67
5. I/O Ports
5.8 Port P7 (P70 to P77) TMP86CS28FG
P7DR (0007H) R/W P7LCR (0FD7H)
7 P77 SEG8 7
6 P76 SEG9 6
5 P75 SEG10 5
4 P74 SEG11 4
3 P73 SEG12 3
2 P72 SEG13 2
1 P71 SEG14 1
0 P70 SEG15 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7LCR
Port P7 segment output control (set for each bit individually)
0: Input/output port 1: Segment output
R/W
P7OUTCR (0FFEH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P7OUTCR
Port P7 input/output control (set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: CMOS output
R/W
P7PRD (0FF7H) Read only
7 P77
6 P76
5 P75
4 P74
3 P73
2 P72
1 P71
0 P70
Page 68
TMP86CS28FG
5.9 Port P8 (P80 to P87)
Port P8 is an 8-bit input/output port that can also be used for LCD segment output. A reset initializes the output latch (P8DR) to "1", the Pch control (P8OUTCR) to "0", and the LCD output control register (P8LCR) to "0". To use a pin in Port P8 as an input port, set P8DR to "1" and then set the corresponding bit in P8LCR and P8OUTCR to "0". To use a pin in Port P8 as an LCD segment output, set the corresponding bit in P8LCR to "1". The output circuit of Port P8 can be set either as sink open-drain output ("0") or CMOS output ("1") individually for each bit in P8OUTCR. Port P8 has a separate data input register. The output latch state can be read from the P8DR register, and the pin state can be read from the P8PRD register. Table 5-11 Register Programming for Port P8 (P80 to P87)
Port Input Function P8DR Port input Port "0" output Port "1" output LCD segment output "1" "0" "1" * P8OUTCR "0" Set as appropriate. * P8LCR "0" "0" "0" "1"
Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that either "1" or "0" can be set.
STOP OUTEN P8OUTCRi P8OUTCRi input P8LCRi input P8LCRi Data input (P8PRD) Output latch read (P8DR) Data output (P8DR) LCD data output D Q
P8i Note) i = 7~0
D
Q
D
Q
Output latch
Figure 5-10 Port P8
Page 69
5. I/O Ports
5.9 Port P8 (P80 to P87) TMP86CS28FG
P8DR (0008H) R/W P8LCR (0FD8H)
7 P87 SEG0 7
6 P86 SEG1 6
5 P85 SEG2 5
4 P84 SEG3 4
3 P83 SEG4 3
2 P82 SEG5 2
1 P81 SEG6 1
0 P80 SEG7 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000) (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P8LCR
Port P8 segment output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Input/output port 1: LCD segment output
R/W
P8OUTCR (0FFFH)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
P8OUTCR
Port P8 input/output control (Set for each bit individually)
0: Sink open-drain output 1: CMOS output
R/W
P8PRD (0FF8H) Read only
7 P87
6 P86
5 P85
4 P84
3 P83
2 P82
1 P81
0 P80
Page 70
TMP86CS28FG
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
The watchdog timer is a fail-safe system to detect rapidly the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops due to spurious noises or the deadlock conditions, and return the CPU to a system recovery routine. The watchdog timer signal for detecting malfunctions can be programmed only once as "reset request" or "interrupt request". Upon the reset release, this signal is initialized to "reset request". When the watchdog timer is not used to detect malfunctions, it can be used as the timer to provide a periodic interrupt.
Note: Care must be taken in system design since the watchdog timer functions are not be operated completely due to effect of disturbing noise.
6.1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Reset release
fc/2 or fs/2 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/219 or fs/211 fc/217 or fs/29
23 15
Selector
Binary counters Clock Clear 1 2 Overflow WDT output
R S Q Reset request INTWDT interrupt request
2
Interrupt request
Internal reset Q SR
WDTEN WDTT
Writing disable code
Writing clear code
WDTOUT
Controller
0034H WDTCR1
0035H WDTCR2
Watchdog timer control registers
Figure 6-1 Watchdog Timer Configuration
Page 71
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86CS28FG
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer control registers (WDTCR1 and WDTCR2). The watchdog timer is automatically enabled after the reset release.
6.2.1
Malfunction Detection Methods Using the Watchdog Timer
The CPU malfunction is detected, as shown below. 1. Set the detection time, select the output, and clear the binary counter. 2. Clear the binary counter repeatedly within the specified detection time. If the CPU malfunctions such as endless loops or the deadlock conditions occur for some reason, the watchdog timer output is activated by the binary-counter overflow unless the binary counters are cleared. When WDTCR1 is set to "1" at this time, the reset request is generated and then internal hardware is initialized. When WDTCR1 is set to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt (INTWDT) is generated. The watchdog timer temporarily stops counting in the STOP mode including the warm-up or IDLE/SLEEP mode, and automatically restarts (continues counting) when the STOP/IDLE/SLEEP mode is inactivated.
Note:The watchdog timer consists of an internal divider and a two-stage binary counter. When the clear code 4EH is written, only the binary counter is cleared, but not the internal divider. The minimum binary-counter overflow time, that depends on the timing at which the clear code (4EH) is written to the WDTCR2 register, may be 3/ 4 of the time set in WDTCR1. Therefore, write the clear code using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set to WDTCR1.
Example :Setting the watchdog timer detection time to 221/fc [s], and resetting the CPU malfunction detection
LD LD LD (WDTCR2), 4EH (WDTCR1), 00001101B (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters. : WDTT 10, WDTOUT 1 : Clears the binary counters (always clears immediately before and after changing WDTT).
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: :
LD
(WDTCR2), 4EH
: Clears the binary counters.
Within 3/4 of WDT detection time
: : LD (WDTCR2), 4EH : Clears the binary counters.
Page 72
TMP86CS28FG
Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 (ATAS) 4 (ATOUT) 3 WDTEN 2 WDTT 1 0 WDTOUT (Initial value: **11 1001)
WDTEN
Watchdog timer enable/disable
0: Disable (Writing the disable code to WDTCR2 is required.) 1: Enable NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 217/fs 215/fs 213/fs 211/fs SLOW1/2 mode 217/fs 215fs 213fs 211/fs
Write only
WDTT
Watchdog timer detection time [s]
00 01 10 11
225/fc 223/fc 221fc 219/fc
Write only
WDTOUT
Watchdog timer output select
0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
Note 1: After clearing WDTOUT to "0", the program cannot set it to "1". Note 2: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz], *: Don't care Note 3: WDTCR1 is a write-only register and must not be used with any of read-modify-write instructions. If WDTCR1 is read, a don't care is read. Note 4: To activate the STOP mode, disable the watchdog timer or clear the counter immediately before entering the STOP mode. After clearing the counter, clear the counter again immediately after the STOP mode is inactivated. Note 5: To clear WDTEN, set the register in accordance with the procedures shown in "6.2.3 Watchdog Timer Disable".
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code
4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (Clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (Disable code) D2H: Enable assigning address trap area Others: Invalid
Write only
Note 1: The disable code is valid only when WDTCR1 = 0. Note 2: *: Don't care Note 3: The binary counter of the watchdog timer must not be cleared by the interrupt task. Note 4: Write the clear code 4EH using a cycle shorter than 3/4 of the time set in WDTCR1.
6.2.2
Watchdog Timer Enable
Setting WDTCR1 to "1" enables the watchdog timer. Since WDTCR1 is initialized to "1" during reset, the watchdog timer is enabled automatically after the reset release.
Page 73
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.2 Watchdog Timer Control TMP86CS28FG
6.2.3
Watchdog Timer Disable
To disable the watchdog timer, set the register in accordance with the following procedures. Setting the register in other procedures causes a malfunction of the microcontroller. 1. Set the interrupt master flag (IMF) to "0". 2. Set WDTCR2 to the clear code (4EH). 3. Set WDTCR1 to "0". 4. Set WDTCR2 to the disable code (B1H).
Note:While the watchdog timer is disabled, the binary counters of the watchdog timer are cleared.
Example :Disabling the watchdog timer
DI LD LDW (WDTCR2), 04EH (WDTCR1), 0B101H : IMF 0 : Clears the binary counter : WDTEN 0, WDTCR2 Disable code
Table 6-1 Watchdog Timer Detection Time (Example: fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz) Watchdog Timer Detection Time[s]
WDTT DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 2.097 524.288 m 131.072 m 32.768 m NORMAL1/2 mode DV7CK = 1 4 1 250 m 62.5 m SLOW mode 4 1 250 m 62.5 m
6.2.4
Watchdog Timer Interrupt (INTWDT)
When WDTCR1 is cleared to "0", a watchdog timer interrupt request (INTWDT) is generated by the binary-counter overflow. A watchdog timer interrupt is the non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When a watchdog timer interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including a watchdog timer interrupt is already accepted, the new watchdog timer interrupt is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if watchdog timer interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate a watchdog timer interrupt, set the stack pointer before setting WDTCR1.
Example :Setting watchdog timer interrupt
LD LD SP, 083FH (WDTCR1), 00001000B : Sets the stack pointer : WDTOUT 0
Page 74
TMP86CS28FG
6.2.5
Watchdog Timer Reset
When a binary-counter overflow occurs while WDTCR1 is set to "1", a watchdog timer reset request is generated. When a watchdog timer reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When a watchdog timer reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
219/fc [s] 217/fc Clock Binary counter Overflow INTWDT interrupt request
(WDTCR1= "0")
(WDTT=11) 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0
Internal reset
(WDTCR1= "1")
A reset occurs Write 4EH to WDTCR2
Figure 6-2 Watchdog Timer Interrupt
Page 75
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86CS28FG
6.3 Address Trap
The Watchdog Timer Control Register 1 and 2 share the addresses with the control registers to generate address traps. Watchdog Timer Control Register 1
WDTCR1 (0034H) 7 6 5 ATAS 4 ATOUT 3 (WDTEN) 2 (WDTT) 1 0 (WDTOUT) (Initial value: **11 1001)
ATAS
Select address trap generation in the internal RAM area Select operation at address trap
0: Generate no address trap 1: Generate address traps (After setting ATAS to "1", writing the control code D2H to WDTCR2 is required) 0: Interrupt request 1: Reset request
Write only
ATOUT
Watchdog Timer Control Register 2
WDTCR2 (0035H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: **** ****)
WDTCR2
Write Watchdog timer control code and address trap area control code
D2H: Enable address trap area selection (ATRAP control code) 4EH: Clear the watchdog timer binary counter (WDT clear code) B1H: Disable the watchdog timer (WDT disable code) Others: Invalid
Write only
6.3.1
Selection of Address Trap in Internal RAM (ATAS)
WDTCR1 specifies whether or not to generate address traps in the internal RAM area. To execute an instruction in the internal RAM area, clear WDTCR1 to "0". To enable the WDTCR1 setting, set WDTCR1 and then write D2H to WDTCR2. Executing an instruction in the SFR or DBR area generates an address trap unconditionally regardless of the setting in WDTCR1.
6.3.2
Selection of Operation at Address Trap (ATOUT)
When an address trap is generated, either the interrupt request or the reset request can be selected by WDTCR1.
6.3.3
Address Trap Interrupt (INTATRAP)
While WDTCR1 is "0", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap interrupt (INTATRAP) will be generated. An address trap interrupt is a non-maskable interrupt which can be accepted regardless of the interrupt master flag (IMF). When an address trap interrupt is generated while the other interrupt including an address trap interrupt is already accepted, the new address trap is processed immediately and the previous interrupt is held pending. Therefore, if address trap interrupts are generated continuously without execution of the RETN instruction, too many levels of nesting may cause a malfunction of the microcontroller. To generate address trap interrupts, set the stack pointer beforehand.
Page 76
TMP86CS28FG
6.3.4
Address Trap Reset
While WDTCR1 is "1", if the CPU should start looping for some cause such as noise and an attempt be made to fetch an instruction from the on-chip RAM (while WDTCR1 is "1"), DBR or the SFR area, address trap reset will be generated. When an address trap reset request is generated, the internal hardware is reset. The reset time is maximum 24/fc [s] (1.5 s @ fc = 16.0 MHz).
Note:When an address trap reset is generated in the SLOW1 mode, the reset time is maximum 24/fc (high-frequency clock) since the high-frequency clock oscillator is restarted. However, when crystals have inaccuracies upon start of the high-frequency clock oscillator, the reset time should be considered as an approximate value because it has slight errors.
Page 77
6. Watchdog Timer (WDT)
6.3 Address Trap TMP86CS28FG
Page 78
TMP86CS28FG
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
The time base timer generates time base for key scanning, dynamic displaying, etc. It also provides a time base timer interrupt (INTTBT).
7.1 Time Base Timer
7.1.1 Configuration
MPX
fc/223 or fs/215 fc/221 or fs/213 fc/216 or fs/28 fc/214 or fs/26 fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/29 or fs/2
Source clock
Falling edge detector
IDLE0, SLEEP0 release request
INTTBT interrupt request
3 TBTCK TBTCR Time base timer control register TBTEN
Figure 7-1 Time Base Timer configuration 7.1.2 Control
Time Base Timer is controlled by Time Base Timer control register (TBTCR). Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) (DVOEN) 6 (DVOCK) 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 TBTEN 2 1 TBTCK 0 (Initial Value: 0000 0000)
TBTEN
Time Base Timer enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 fc/223 fc/221 fc/216 fc/2
14
DV7CK = 1 fs/215 fs/213 fs/28 fs/2
6
SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/215 fs/213 - - - - - - R/W
TBTCK
Time Base Timer interrupt Frequency select : [Hz]
010 011 100 101 110 111
fc/213 fc/2
12
fs/25 fs/2
4
fc/211 fc/2
9
fs/23 fs/2
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz], *; Don't care
Page 79
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.1 Time Base Timer TMP86CS28FG
Note 2: The interrupt frequency (TBTCK) must be selected with the time base timer disabled (TBTEN="0"). (The interrupt frequency must not be changed with the disable from the enable state.) Both frequency selection and enabling can be performed simultaneously.
Example :Set the time base timer frequency to fc/216 [Hz] and enable an INTTBT interrupt.
LD LD DI SET (EIRL) . 6 (TBTCR) , 00000010B (TBTCR) , 00001010B ; TBTCK 010 ; TBTEN 1 ; IMF 0
Table 7-1 Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Time Base Timer Interrupt Frequency [Hz] TBTCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 1.91 7.63 244.14 976.56 1953.13 3906.25 7812.5 31250 NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 1 1 4 128 512 1024 2048 4096 16384 1 4 - - - - - - SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode
7.1.3
Function
An INTTBT ( Time Base Timer Interrupt ) is generated on the first falling edge of source clock ( The divider output of the timing generator which is selected by TBTCK. ) after time base timer has been enabled. The divider is not cleared by the program; therefore, only the first interrupt may be generated ahead of the set interrupt period ( Figure 7-2 ).
Source clock
TBTCR
INTTBT Interrupt period Enable TBT
Figure 7-2 Time Base Timer Interrupt
Page 80
TMP86CS28FG
7.2 Divider Output (DVO)
Approximately 50% duty pulse can be output using the divider output circuit, which is useful for piezoelectric buzzer drive. Divider output is from DVO pin.
7.2.1
Configuration
Output latch Data output D Q DVO pin
fc/213 or fs/25 fc/212 or fs/24 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/210 or fs/22
MPX A B CY D S 2 DVOCK TBTCR Divider output control register (a) configuration DVOEN
Port output latch TBTCR
DVO pin output (b) Timing chart
Figure 7-3 Divider Output 7.2.2 Control
The Divider Output is controlled by the Time Base Timer Control Register. Time Base Timer Control Register
7 TBTCR (0036H) DVOEN 6 DVOCK 5 4 (DV7CK) 3 (TBTEN) 2 1 (TBTCK) 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
DVOEN
Divider output enable / disable
0: Disable 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22 SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 Mode fs/25 fs/24 fs/23 fs/22
R/W
DVOCK
Divider Output (DVO) frequency selection: [Hz]
00 01 10 11
fc/213 fc/212 fc/211 fc/210
R/W
Note: Selection of divider output frequency (DVOCK) must be made while divider output is disabled (DVOEN="0"). Also, in other words, when changing the state of the divider output frequency from enabled (DVOEN="1") to disable(DVOEN="0"), do not change the setting of the divider output frequency.
Page 81
7. Time Base Timer (TBT)
7.2 Divider Output (DVO) TMP86CS28FG
Example :1.95 kHz pulse output (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD LD
(TBTCR) , 00000000B (TBTCR) , 10000000B
; DVOCK "00" ; DVOEN "1"
Table 7-2 Divider Output Frequency ( Example : fc = 16.0 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz )
Divider Output Frequency [Hz] DVOCK NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode DV7CK = 0 00 01 10 11 1.953 k 3.906 k 7.813 k 15.625 k DV7CK = 1 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 1.024 k 2.048 k 4.096 k 8.192 k
Page 82
8.1
8.1.1
MCAP10
S INTTC10 interript
A
TC10S
Configuration
Y
B Start MPPG10 TC10S clear Clear PPG output mode
2
Decoder Set Q
Command start
Pulse width measurement mode
External trigger
External trigger start
Rising
Falling
16-Bit TimerCounter 10
Edge detector
METT10
TC1 Clear B A S Match CMP Y Source clock 16-bit up-counter Pulse width measurement mode
Port (Note)
D
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
Figure 8-1 TimerCounter 10 (TC10)
Page 83
Clear Selector Set Capture TC10DRB TC10DRA 16-bit timer register A, B Toggle Enable S Q PPG output mode Internal reset Write to TC10CR
fc/211, fs/23
A
fc/27
B
Y
fc/23
C
S
Toggle Q Set Clear Port (Note) pin
2
Window mode
TC10CK
ACAP10
TC10CR
TFF10
TC10 control register
Note: Function I/O may not operate depending on I/O port setting. For more details, see the chapter "I/O Port".
TMP86CS28FG
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.1 16-Bit TimerCounter 10 TMP86CS28FG
8.1.2
TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 10 is controlled by the TimerCounter 10 control register (TC10CR) and two 16-bit timer registers (TC10DRA and TC10DRB).
Timer Register
15 TC10DRA (0011H, 0010H) TC10DRB (0013H, 0012H) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC10DRAH (0011H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC10DRBH (0013H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC10DRAL (0010H) Read/Write TC10DRBL (0012H) Read/Write (Write enabled only in the PPG output mode)
TimerCounter 10 Control Register
7 TC10CR (0014H) 6 ACAP10 MCAP10 METT10 MPPG10 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF10
TC10S
TC10CK
TC10M
TFF10 ACAP10 MCAP10 METT10 MPPG10
Timer F/F10 control Auto capture control Pulse width measurement mode control External trigger timer mode control PPG output control
0: Clear 0:Auto-capture disable 0:Double edge capture 0:Trigger start 0:Continuous pulse generation Timer 00: Stop and counter clear 01: Command start 10: Rising edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Rising edge count (Event) Positive logic count (Window) 11: Falling edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Falling edge count (Event) Negative logic count (Window) O O
1: Set 1:Auto-capture enable 1:Single edge capture
R/W
R/W 1:Trigger start and stop 1:One-shot Extrigger O - Event O - Window O - Pulse O - PPG O O
TC10S
TC10 start control
-
O
O
O
O
O
R/W
-
O
O
O
O
O
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 TC10CK TC10 source clock select [Hz] 00 01 10 11 TC10 operating mode select fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 External clock (TC10 pin input)
Divider
SLOW, SLEEP mode fs/23 - - R/W
DV9 DV5 DV1
TC10M
00: Timer/external trigger timer/event counter mode 01: Window mode 10: Pulse width measurement mode 11: PPG (Programmable pulse generate) output mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: The timer register consists of two shift registers. A value set in the timer register becomes valid at the rising edge of the first source clock pulse that occurs after the upper byte (TC10DRAH and TC10DRBH) is written. Therefore, write the lower byte and the upper byte in this order (it is recommended to write the register with a 16-bit access instruction). Writing only the lower byte (TC10DRAL and TC10DRBL) does not enable the setting of the timer register. Note 3: To set the mode, source clock, PPG output control and timer F/F control, write to TC10CR1 during TC10S=00. Set the timer F/F10 control until the first timer start after setting the PPG mode.
Page 84
TMP86CS28FG
Note 4: Auto-capture can be used only in the timer, event counter, and window modes. Note 5: To set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC10DRA > TC10DRB > 1 (PPG output mode), TC10DRA > 1 (other modes) Note 6: Set TFF10 to "0" in the mode except PPG output mode. Note 7: Set TC10DRB after setting TC10M to the PPG output mode. Note 8: When the STOP mode is entered, the start control (TC10S) is cleared to "00" automatically, and the timer stops. After the STOP mode is exited, set the TC10S to use the timer counter again. Note 9: Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC10. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Note 10:Since the up-counter value is captured into TC10DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC10CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC10DRB for the first time.
8.1.3
Function
TimerCounter 10 has six types of operating modes: timer, external trigger timer, event counter, window, pulse width measurement, programmable pulse generator output modes.
8.1.3.1
Timer mode
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register 1A (TC10DRA) value is detected, an INTTC10 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. Setting TC10CR to "1" captures the up-counter value into the timer register 1B (TC10DRB) with the auto-capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC10. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC10DRB by the source clock of upcounter after setting TC10CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC10DRB for the first time. Table 8-1 Internal Source Clock for TimerCounter 10 (Example: fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode TC10CK DV7CK = 0 Resolution [s] 00 01 10 128 8.0 0.5 Maximum Time Setting [s] 8.39 0.524 32.77 m Resolution [s] 244.14 8.0 0.5 DV7CK = 1 Maximum Time Setting [s] 16.0 0.524 32.77 m Resolution [s] 244.14 - - Maximum Time Setting [s] 16.0 - - SLOW, SLEEP mode
Example 1 :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/211 [Hz] and generating an interrupt 1 second later (fc = 16 MHz, TBTCR = "0")
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC10CR), 00000000B (TC10CR), 00010000B (EIRL). 7 (TC10DRA), 1E84H ; Sets the timer register (1 s / 211/fc = 1E84H) ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC10 ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC10
Page 85
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.1 16-Bit TimerCounter 10 TMP86CS28FG
Example 2 :Auto-capture
LD : LD (TC10CR), 01010000B : WA, (TC10DRB) ; Reads the capture value ; ACAP10 1
Note: Since the up-counter value is captured into TC10DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC10CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC10DRB for the first time.
Timer start Source clock Counter TC10DRA
0 ? 1 2 3 4 n-1 n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
n
INTTC10 interruput request
Match detect (a) Timer mode
Counter clear
Source clock
Counter
m-2
m-1
m
m+1
m+2
n-1
n
n+1
Capture TC10DRB
? m-1 m m+1 m+2 n-1
Capture
n n+1
ACAP10 (b) Auto-capture
Figure 8-2 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 86
TMP86CS28FG
8.1.3.2
External Trigger Timer Mode
In the external trigger timer mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC10 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. For the trigger edge used to start counting, either the rising or falling edge is defined in TC10CR. * When TC10CR is set to "1" (trigger start and stop) When a match between the up-counter and the TC10DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC10 interrupt request is generated. If the edge opposite to trigger edge is detected before detecting a match between the upcounter and the TC10DRA, the up-counter is cleared and halted without generating an interrupt request. Therefore, this mode can be used to detect exceeding the specified pulse by interrupt. After being halted, the up-counter restarts counting when the trigger edge is detected. * When TC10CR is set to "0" (trigger start) When a match between the up-counter and the TC10DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC10 interrupt request is generated. The edge opposite to the trigger edge has no effect in count up. The trigger edge for the next counting is ignored if detecting it before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC10DRA.
Since the TC10 pin input has the noise rejection, pulses of 4/fc [s] or less are rejected as noise. A pulse width of 12/fc [s] or more is required to ensure edge detection. The rejection circuit is turned off in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode, but a pulse width of one machine cycle or more is required. Example 1 :Generating an interrupt 1 ms after the rising edge of the input pulse to the TC10 pin (fc =16 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC10CR), 00000100B (TC10CR), 00100100B (EIRL). 7 (TC10DRA), 007DH ; 1ms / 27/fc = 7DH ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC10 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC10 external trigger, METT10 = 0
Example 2 :Generating an interrupt when the low-level pulse with 4 ms or more width is input to the TC10 pin (fc =16 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC10CR), 00000100B (TC10CR), 01110100B (EIRL). 7 (TC10DRA), 01F4H ; 4 ms / 27/fc = 1F4H ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC10 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC10 external trigger, METT10 = 0
Page 87
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.1 16-Bit TimerCounter 10 TMP86CS28FG
Count start TC10 pin input
Count start
At the rising edge (TC10S = 10)
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
4
n-1
n
0
1
2
3
TC10DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC10 interrupt request
(a) Trigger start (METT10 = 0)
At the rising edge (TC10S = 10)
Count start TC10 pin input
Count clear
Count start
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
m-1
m
0
1
2
3
n
0
TC10DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC10 interrupt request
Note: m < n (b) Trigger start and stop (METT10 = 1)
Figure 8-3 External Trigger Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 88
TMP86CS28FG
8.1.3.3
Event Counter Mode
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the edge of the input pulse to the TC10 pin. Either the rising or falling edge of the input pulse is selected as the count up edge in TC10CR. When a match between the up-counter and the TC10DRA value is detected, an INTTC10 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at each edge of the input pulse to the TC10 pin. Since a match between the up-counter and the value set to TC10DRA is detected at the edge opposite to the selected edge, an INTTC10 interrupt request is generated after a match of the value at the edge opposite to the selected edge. Two or more machine cycles are required for the low-or high-level pulse input to the TC10 pin. Setting TC10CR to "1" captures the up-counter value into TC10DRB with the auto capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC10. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC10DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC10CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC10DRB for the first time.
Timer start
TC10 pin Input Up-counter TC10DRA INTTC10 interrput request ?
n-1
0
1
2
n
0
1
2
At the rising edge (TC10S = 10)
n
Match detect
Counter clear
Figure 8-4 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
Table 8-2 Input Pulse Width to TC10 Pin
Minimum Pulse Width [s] NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode High-going Low-going 23/fc 23/fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 23/fs 23/fs
Page 89
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.1 16-Bit TimerCounter 10 TMP86CS28FG
8.1.3.4
Window Mode
In the window mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the pulse that is logical ANDed product of the input pulse to the TC10 pin (window pulse) and the internal source clock. Either the positive logic (count up during high-going pulse) or negative logic (count up during low-going pulse) can be selected. When a match between the up-counter and the TC10DRA value is detected, an INTTC10 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. Define the window pulse to the frequency which is sufficiently lower than the internal source clock programmed with TC10CR.
Count start Timer start Count stop Count start
TC10 pin input Internal clock Counter TC10DRA INTTC10 interrput request ? 7 Match detect (a) Positive logic (TC10S = 10)
Timer start Count start Count stop Count start
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
Counter clear
TC10 pin input Internal clock Counter TC10DRA INTTC10 interrput request (b) Negative logic (TC10S = 11) ? 9 Match detect Counter clear 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 90 1
Figure 8-5 Window Mode Timing Chart
Page 90
TMP86CS28FG
8.1.3.5
Pulse Width Measurement Mode
In the pulse width measurement mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC10 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. Either the rising or falling edge of the internal clock is selected as the trigger edge in TC10CR. Either the single- or double-edge capture is selected as the trigger edge in TC10CR. * When TC10CR is set to "1" (single-edge capture) Either high- or low-level input pulse width can be measured. To measure the high-level input pulse width, set the rising edge to TC10CR. To measure the low-level input pulse width, set the falling edge to TC10CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC10DRB and generates an INTTC10 interrupt request. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then restarts counting when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. * When TC10CR is set to "0" (double-edge capture) The cycle starting with either the high- or low-going input pulse can be measured. To measure the cycle starting with the high-going pulse, set the rising edge to TC10CR. To measure the cycle starting with the low-going pulse, set the falling edge to TC10CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC10DRB and generates an INTTC10 interrupt request. The up-counter continues counting up, and captures the up-counter value into TC10DRB and generates an INTTC10 interrupt request when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting.
Note 1: The captured value must be read from TC10DRB until the next trigger edge is detected. If not read, the captured value becomes a don't care. It is recommended to use a 16-bit access instruction to read the captured value from TC10DRB. Note 2: For the single-edge capture, the counter after capturing the value stops at "1" until detecting the next edge. Therefore, the second captured value is "1" larger than the captured value immediately after counting starts. Note 3: The first captured value after the timer starts may be read incorrectively, therefore, ignore the first captured value.
Page 91
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.1 16-Bit TimerCounter 10 TMP86CS28FG
Example :Duty measurement (resolution fc/27 [Hz])
CLR LD DI SET EI LD : PINTTC10: CPL JRS LD LD LD RETI SINTTC10: LD LD LD : RETI : VINTTC10: DW PINTTC10 ; INTTC10 Interrupt vector ; Duty calculation A, (TC10DRBL) W,(TC10DRBH) (WIDTH), WA ; Stores cycle in RAM ; Reads TC10DRB (Cycle) (INTTC10SW). 0 F, SINTTC10 A, (TC10DRBL) W,(TC10DRBH) (HPULSE), WA ; Stores high-level pulse width in RAM ; Reads TC10DRB (High-level pulse width) ; INTTC10 interrupt, inverts and tests INTTC10 service switch (TC10CR), 00100110B (EIRL). 7 (INTTC10SW). 0 (TC10CR), 00000110B ; INTTC10 service switch initial setting Address set to convert INTTC10SW at each INTTC10 ; Sets the TC10 mode and source clock ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC10 ; IMF= "1" ; Starts TC10 with an external trigger at MCAP10 = 0
WIDTH HPULSE TC10 pin INTTC10 interrupt request INTTC10SW
Page 92
TMP86CS28FG
Count start TC10 pin input Trigger
Count start (TC10S = "10")
Internal clock Counter TC10DRB INTTC10 interrupt request
0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n
0
1 Capture n
2
3
[Application] High-or low-level pulse width measurement (a) Single-edge capture (MCAP10 = "1") Count start Count start (TC10S = "10")
TC10 pin input
Internal clock Counter TC10DRB INTTC10 interrupt request [Application] (1) Cycle/frequency measurement (2) Duty measurement (b) Double-edge capture (MCAP10 = "0")
0 1 2 3 4 n+1
n
n+1 n+2 n+3 Capture n
m-2 m-1 m 0 1 Capture m
2
Figure 8-6 Pulse Width Measurement Mode
Page 93
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.1 16-Bit TimerCounter 10 TMP86CS28FG
8.1.3.6
Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode
In the programmable pulse generation (PPG) mode, an arbitrary duty pulse is generated by counting performed in the internal clock. To start the timer, TC10CR specifies either the edge of the input pulse to the TC10 pin or the command start. TC10CR specifies whether a duty pulse is produced continuously or not (one-shot pulse). * When TC10CR is set to "0" (Continuous pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC10DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC10 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC10DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC10 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting and pulse generation. When TC10S is cleared to "00" during PPG output, the PPG pin retains the level immediately before the counter stops. * When TC10CR is set to "1" (One-shot pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC10DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC10 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC10DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC10 interrupt request is generated. TC10CR is cleared to "00" automatically at this time, and the timer stops. The pulse generated by PPG retains the same level as that when the timer stops.
Since the output level of the PPG pin can be set with TC10CR when the timer starts, a positive or negative pulse can be generated. Since the inverted level of the timer F/F1 output level is output to the PPG pin, specify TC10CR to "0" to set the high level to the PPG pin, and "1" to set the low level to the PPG pin. Upon reset, the timer F/F1 is initialized to "0".
Note 1: To change TC10DRA or TC10DRB during a run of the timer, set a value sufficiently larger than the count value of the counter. Setting a value smaller than the count value of the counter during a run of the timer may generate a pulse different from that specified. Note 2: Do not change TC10CR during a run of the timer. TC10CR can be set correctly only at initialization (after reset). When the timer stops during PPG, TC10CR can not be set correctly from this point onward if the PPG output has the level which is inverted of the level when the timer starts. (Setting TC10CR specifies the timer F/F1 to the level inverted of the programmed value.) Therefore, the timer F/F1 needs to be initialized to ensure an arbitrary level of the PPG output. To initialize the timer F/F1, change TC10CR to the timer mode (it is not required to start the timer mode), and then set the PPG mode. Set TC10CR at this time. Note 3: In the PPG mode, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC10DRA > TC10DRB Note 4: Set TC10DRB after changing the mode of TC10M to the PPG mode.
Page 94
TMP86CS28FG
Example :Generating a pulse which is high-going for 800 s and low-going for 200 s (fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port LD LDW LDW LD (TC10CR), 10000111B (TC10DRA), 007DH (TC10DRB), 0019H (TC10CR), 10010111B ; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock ; Sets the cycle (1 ms / 27/fc ms = 007DH) ; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 s / 27/fc = 0019H) ; Starts the timer
Example :After stopping PPG, setting the PPG pin to a high-level to restart PPG (fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port LD LDW LDW LD : LD LD LD LD (TC10CR), 10000111B (TC10DRA), 007DH (TC10DRB), 0019H (TC10CR), 10010111B : (TC10CR), 10000111B (TC10CR), 10000100B (TC10CR), 00000111B (TC10CR), 00010111B ; Stops the timer ; Sets the timer mode ; Sets the PPG mode, TFF10 = 0 ; Starts the timer ; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock ; Sets the cycle (1 ms / 27/fc s = 007DH) ; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 s / 27/fc = 0019H) ; Starts the timer
I/O port output latch shared with PPG output Data output D R Q
Port output enable PPG pin
Function output TC10CR Write to TC10CR Internal reset Match to TC10DRB Match to TC10DRA Set Clear Toggle Timer F/F10 INTTC10 interrupt request TC10CR clear Q
Figure 8-7 PPG Output
Page 95
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.1 16-Bit TimerCounter 10 TMP86CS28FG
Timer start
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
TC10DRB
n
Match detect TC10DRA
m
PPG pin output INTTC10 interrupt request Note: m > n (a) Continuous pulse generation (TC10S = 01)
Count start
TC10 pin input
Trigger
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
n
n+1
m
0
TC10DRB
n
TC10DRA
m
PPG pin output INTTC10 interrupt request [Application] One-shot pulse output (b) One-shot pulse generation (TC10S = 10) Note: m > n
Figure 8-8 PPG Mode Timing Chart
Page 96
8.2
8.2.1
MCAP11
S INTTC11 interript
Configuration
A
TC11S
Y
B Command start Start MPPG11 TC11S clear Clear METT11 PPG output mode Set Q
2
Decoder
Pulse width measurement mode
External trigger
External trigger start
Rising
Falling
16-Bit TimerCounter 11
Edge detector
TC1 Clear B A S Match CMP Window mode Clear Selector S Q Set Capture TC11DRB TC11DRA ACAP11 16-bit timer register A, B Enable Toggle Y Source clock 16-bit up-counter Pulse width measurement mode
Port (Note)
D
Figure 8-9 TimerCounter 11 (TC11)
Page 97
Write to TC11CR
fc/2
11,
fs/2
3
A
fc/2
7
B
Y
fc/23
C
S
Toggle Q Set Clear Port (Note) PPG output mode Internal reset pin
2
TC11CK
TC11CR
TFF11
TC11 control register
Note: Function I/O may not operate depending on I/O port setting. For more details, see the chapter "I/O Port".
TMP86CS28FG
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.2 16-Bit TimerCounter 11 TMP86CS28FG
8.2.2
TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 11 is controlled by the TimerCounter 11 control register (TC11CR) and two 16-bit timer registers (TC11DRA and TC11DRB).
Timer Register
15 TC11DRA (0021H, 0020H) TC11DRB (0023H, 0022H) 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TC11DRAH (0021H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC11DRBH (0023H) (Initial value: 1111 1111 1111 1111) TC11DRAL (0020H) Read/Write TC11DRBL (0022H) Read/Write (Write enabled only in the PPG output mode)
TimerCounter 11 Control Register
7 TC11CR (0024H) 6 ACAP11 MCAP11 METT11 MPPG11 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF11
TC11S
TC11CK
TC11M
TFF11 ACAP11 MCAP11 METT11 MPPG11
Timer F/F11 control Auto capture control Pulse width measurement mode control External trigger timer mode control PPG output control
0: Clear 0:Auto-capture disable 0:Double edge capture 0:Trigger start 0:Continuous pulse generation Timer 00: Stop and counter clear 01: Command start 10: Rising edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Rising edge count (Event) Positive logic count (Window) 11: Falling edge start (Ex-trigger/Pulse/PPG) Falling edge count (Event) Negative logic count (Window) O O
1: Set 1:Auto-capture enable 1:Single edge capture
R/W
R/W 1:Trigger start and stop 1:One-shot Extrigger O - Event O - Window O - Pulse O - PPG O O
TC11S
TC11 start control
-
O
O
O
O
O
R/W
-
O
O
O
O
O
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 TC11CK TC11 source clock select [Hz] 00 01 10 11 TC11 operating mode select fc/211 fc/27 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/23 External clock (TC11 pin input)
Divider
SLOW, SLEEP mode fs/23 - - R/W
DV9 DV5 DV1
TC11M
00: Timer/external trigger timer/event counter mode 01: Window mode 10: Pulse width measurement mode 11: PPG (Programmable pulse generate) output mode
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz], fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: The timer register consists of two shift registers. A value set in the timer register becomes valid at the rising edge of the first source clock pulse that occurs after the upper byte (TC11DRAH and TC11DRBH) is written. Therefore, write the lower
Page 98
TMP86CS28FG
byte and the upper byte in this order (it is recommended to write the register with a 16-bit access instruction). Writing only the lower byte (TC11DRAL and TC11DRBL) does not enable the setting of the timer register. Note 3: To set the mode, source clock, PPG output control and timer F/F control, write to TC11CR1 during TC11S=00. Set the timer F/F10 control until the first timer start after setting the PPG mode. Note 4: Auto-capture can be used only in the timer, event counter, and window modes. Note 5: To set the timer registers, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC11DRA > TC11DRB > 1 (PPG output mode), TC11DRA > 1 (other modes) Note 6: Set TFF11 to "0" in the mode except PPG output mode. Note 7: Set TC11DRB after setting TC11M to the PPG output mode. Note 8: When the STOP mode is entered, the start control (TC11S) is cleared to "00" automatically, and the timer stops. After the STOP mode is exited, set the TC11S to use the timer counter again. Note 9: Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC11. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Note 10:Since the up-counter value is captured into TC11DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC11CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC11DRB for the first time.
8.2.3
Function
TimerCounter 11 has six types of operating modes: timer, external trigger timer, event counter, window, pulse width measurement, programmable pulse generator output modes.
8.2.3.1
Timer mode
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register 1A (TC11DRA) value is detected, an INTTC11 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting. Setting TC11CR to "1" captures the up-counter value into the timer register 1B (TC11DRB) with the auto-capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC11. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC11DRB by the source clock of upcounter after setting TC11CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC11DRB for the first time. Table 8-3 Internal Source Clock for TimerCounter 11 (Example: fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode TC11CK DV7CK = 0 Resolution [s] 00 01 10 128 8.0 0.5 Maximum Time Setting [s] 8.39 0.524 32.77 m Resolution [s] 244.14 8.0 0.5 DV7CK = 1 Maximum Time Setting [s] 16.0 0.524 32.77 m Resolution [s] 244.14 - - Maximum Time Setting [s] 16.0 - - SLOW, SLEEP mode
Page 99
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.2 16-Bit TimerCounter 11 TMP86CS28FG
Example 1 :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/211 [Hz] and generating an interrupt 1 second later (fc = 16 MHz, TBTCR = "0")
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC11CR), 00000000B (TC11CR), 00010000B (EIRL). 2 (TC11DRA), 1E84H ; Sets the timer register (1 s / 211/fc = 1E84H) ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC11 ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC11
Example 2 :Auto-capture
LD : LD (TC11CR), 01010000B : WA, (TC11DRB) ; Reads the capture value ; ACAP11 1
Note: Since the up-counter value is captured into TC11DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC11CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC11DRB for the first time.
Timer start Source clock Counter TC11DRA
0 ? 1 2 3 4 n-1 n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
n
INTTC11 interruput request
Match detect (a) Timer mode
Counter clear
Source clock
Counter
m-2
m-1
m
m+1
m+2
n-1
n
n+1
Capture TC11DRB
? m-1 m m+1 m+2 n-1
Capture
n n+1
ACAP11 (b) Auto-capture
Figure 8-10 Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 100
TMP86CS28FG
8.2.3.2
External Trigger Timer Mode
In the external trigger timer mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC11 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. For the trigger edge used to start counting, either the rising or falling edge is defined in TC11CR. * When TC11CR is set to "1" (trigger start and stop) When a match between the up-counter and the TC11DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC11 interrupt request is generated. If the edge opposite to trigger edge is detected before detecting a match between the upcounter and the TC11DRA, the up-counter is cleared and halted without generating an interrupt request. Therefore, this mode can be used to detect exceeding the specified pulse by interrupt. After being halted, the up-counter restarts counting when the trigger edge is detected. * When TC11CR is set to "0" (trigger start) When a match between the up-counter and the TC11DRA value is detected after the timer starts, the up-counter is cleared and halted and an INTTC11 interrupt request is generated. The edge opposite to the trigger edge has no effect in count up. The trigger edge for the next counting is ignored if detecting it before detecting a match between the up-counter and the TC11DRA.
Since the TC11 pin input has the noise rejection, pulses of 4/fc [s] or less are rejected as noise. A pulse width of 12/fc [s] or more is required to ensure edge detection. The rejection circuit is turned off in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode, but a pulse width of one machine cycle or more is required. Example 1 :Generating an interrupt 1 ms after the rising edge of the input pulse to the TC11 pin (fc =16 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC11CR), 00000100B (TC11CR), 00100100B (EIRL). 2 (TC11DRA), 007DH ; 1ms / 27/fc = 7DH ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC11 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC11 external trigger, METT11 = 0
Example 2 :Generating an interrupt when the low-level pulse with 4 ms or more width is input to the TC11 pin (fc =16 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD LD (TC11CR), 00000100B (TC11CR), 01110100B (EIRL). 2 (TC11DRA), 01F4H ; 4 ms / 27/fc = 1F4H ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC11 interrupt ; IMF= "1" ; Selects the source clock and mode ; Starts TC11 external trigger, METT11 = 0
Page 101
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.2 16-Bit TimerCounter 11 TMP86CS28FG
Count start TC11 pin input
Count start
At the rising edge (TC11S = 10)
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
4
n-1
n
0
1
2
3
TC11DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC11 interrupt request
(a) Trigger start (METT11 = 0)
At the rising edge (TC11S = 10)
Count start TC11 pin input
Count clear
Count start
Source clock
Up-counter
0
1
2
3
m-1
m
0
1
2
3
n
0
TC11DRA
n
Match detect
Count clear
INTTC11 interrupt request
Note: m < n (b) Trigger start and stop (METT11 = 1)
Figure 8-11 External Trigger Timer Mode Timing Chart
Page 102
TMP86CS28FG
8.2.3.3
Event Counter Mode
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the edge of the input pulse to the TC11 pin. Either the rising or falling edge of the input pulse is selected as the count up edge in TC11CR. When a match between the up-counter and the TC11DRA value is detected, an INTTC11 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at each edge of the input pulse to the TC11 pin. Since a match between the up-counter and the value set to TC11DRA is detected at the edge opposite to the selected edge, an INTTC11 interrupt request is generated after a match of the value at the edge opposite to the selected edge. Two or more machine cycles are required for the low-or high-level pulse input to the TC11 pin. Setting TC11CR to "1" captures the up-counter value into TC11DRB with the auto capture function. Use the auto-capture function in the operative condition of TC11. A captured value may not be fixed if it's read after the execution of the timer stop or auto-capture disable. Read the capture value in a capture enabled condition. Since the up-counter value is captured into TC11DRB by the source clock of up-counter after setting TC11CR to "1". Therefore, to read the captured value, wait at least one cycle of the internal source clock before reading TC11DRB for the first time.
Timer start
TC11 pin Input Up-counter TC11DRA INTTC11 interrput request ?
n-1
0
1
2
n
0
1
2
At the rising edge (TC11S = 10)
n
Match detect
Counter clear
Figure 8-12 Event Counter Mode Timing Chart
Table 8-4 Input Pulse Width to TC11 Pin
Minimum Pulse Width [s] NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 Mode High-going Low-going 23/fc 23/fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 Mode 23/fs 23/fs
Page 103
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.2 16-Bit TimerCounter 11 TMP86CS28FG
8.2.3.4
Window Mode
In the window mode, the up-counter counts up at the rising edge of the pulse that is logical ANDed product of the input pulse to the TC11 pin (window pulse) and the internal source clock. Either the positive logic (count up during high-going pulse) or negative logic (count up during low-going pulse) can be selected. When a match between the up-counter and the TC11DRA value is detected, an INTTC11 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. Define the window pulse to the frequency which is sufficiently lower than the internal source clock programmed with TC11CR.
Count start Timer start
Count stop
Count start
TC11 pin input Internal clock Counter TC11DRA INTTC11 interrput request ? 7 Match detect (a) Positive logic (TC11S = 10)
Timer start Count start Count stop Count start
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
Counter clear
TC11 pin input Internal clock Counter TC11DRA INTTC11 interrput request (b) Negative logic (TC11S = 11) ? 9 Match detect Counter clear 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 90 1
Figure 8-13 Window Mode Timing Chart
Page 104
TMP86CS28FG
8.2.3.5
Pulse Width Measurement Mode
In the pulse width measurement mode, the up-counter starts counting by the input pulse triggering of the TC11 pin, and counts up at the edge of the internal clock. Either the rising or falling edge of the internal clock is selected as the trigger edge in TC11CR. Either the single- or double-edge capture is selected as the trigger edge in TC11CR. * When TC11CR is set to "1" (single-edge capture) Either high- or low-level input pulse width can be measured. To measure the high-level input pulse width, set the rising edge to TC11CR. To measure the low-level input pulse width, set the falling edge to TC11CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC11DRB and generates an INTTC11 interrupt request. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then restarts counting when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. * When TC11CR is set to "0" (double-edge capture) The cycle starting with either the high- or low-going input pulse can be measured. To measure the cycle starting with the high-going pulse, set the rising edge to TC11CR. To measure the cycle starting with the low-going pulse, set the falling edge to TC11CR. When detecting the edge opposite to the trigger edge used to start counting after the timer starts, the up-counter captures the up-counter value into TC11DRB and generates an INTTC11 interrupt request. The up-counter continues counting up, and captures the up-counter value into TC11DRB and generates an INTTC11 interrupt request when detecting the trigger edge used to start counting. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting.
Note 1: The captured value must be read from TC11DRB until the next trigger edge is detected. If not read, the captured value becomes a don't care. It is recommended to use a 16-bit access instruction to read the captured value from TC11DRB. Note 2: For the single-edge capture, the counter after capturing the value stops at "1" until detecting the next edge. Therefore, the second captured value is "1" larger than the captured value immediately after counting starts. Note 3: The first captured value after the timer starts may be read incorrectively, therefore, ignore the first captured value.
Page 105
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.2 16-Bit TimerCounter 11 TMP86CS28FG
Example :Duty measurement (resolution fc/27 [Hz])
CLR LD DI SET EI LD : PINTTC11: CPL JRS LD LD LD RETI SINTTC11: LD LD LD : RETI : VINTTC11: DW PINTTC11 ; INTTC11 Interrupt vector ; Duty calculation A, (TC11DRBL) W,(TC11DRBH) (WIDTH), WA ; Stores cycle in RAM ; Reads TC11DRB (Cycle) (INTTC11SW). 0 F, SINTTC11 A, (TC11DRBL) W,(TC11DRBH) (HPULSE), WA ; Stores high-level pulse width in RAM ; Reads TC11DRB (High-level pulse width) ; INTTC11 interrupt, inverts and tests INTTC11 service switch (TC11CR), 00100110B (EIRH). 7 (INTTC11SW). 0 (TC11CR), 00000110B ; INTTC11 service switch initial setting Address set to convert INTTC11SW at each INTTC11 ; Sets the TC11 mode and source clock ; IMF= "0" ; Enables INTTC11 ; IMF= "1" ; Starts TC11 with an external trigger at MCAP11 = 0
WIDTH HPULSE TC11 pin INTTC11 interrupt request INTTC11SW
Page 106
TMP86CS28FG
Count start TC11 pin input Trigger
Count start (TC11S = "10")
Internal clock Counter TC11DRB INTTC11 interrupt request
0 1 2 3 4 n-1 n 0 1 Capture n 2 3
[Application] High-or low-level pulse width measurement (a) Single-edge capture (MCAP11 = "1") Count start Count start (TC11S = "10")
TC11 pin input
Internal clock Counter TC11DRB INTTC11 interrupt request [Application] (1) Cycle/frequency measurement (2) Duty measurement (b) Double-edge capture (MCAP11 = "0")
0 1 2 3 4 n+1
n
n+1 n+2 n+3 Capture n
m-2 m-1 m 0 1 Capture m
2
Figure 8-14 Pulse Width Measurement Mode
Page 107
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.2 16-Bit TimerCounter 11 TMP86CS28FG
8.2.3.6
Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode
In the programmable pulse generation (PPG) mode, an arbitrary duty pulse is generated by counting performed in the internal clock. To start the timer, TC11CR specifies either the edge of the input pulse to the TC11 pin or the command start. TC11CR specifies whether a duty pulse is produced continuously or not (one-shot pulse). * When TC11CR is set to "0" (Continuous pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC11DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC11 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC11DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC11 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter is cleared at this time, and then continues counting and pulse generation. When TC11S is cleared to "00" during PPG output, the PPG pin retains the level immediately before the counter stops. * When TC11CR is set to "1" (One-shot pulse generation) When a match between the up-counter and the TC11DRB value is detected after the timer starts, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC11 interrupt request is generated. The up-counter continues counting. When a match between the up-counter and the TC11DRA value is detected, the level of the PPG pin is inverted and an INTTC11 interrupt request is generated. TC11CR is cleared to "00" automatically at this time, and the timer stops. The pulse generated by PPG retains the same level as that when the timer stops.
Since the output level of the PPG pin can be set with TC11CR when the timer starts, a positive or negative pulse can be generated. Since the inverted level of the timer F/F1 output level is output to the PPG pin, specify TC11CR to "0" to set the high level to the PPG pin, and "1" to set the low level to the PPG pin. Upon reset, the timer F/F1 is initialized to "0".
Note 1: To change TC11DRA or TC11DRB during a run of the timer, set a value sufficiently larger than the count value of the counter. Setting a value smaller than the count value of the counter during a run of the timer may generate a pulse different from that specified. Note 2: Do not change TC11CR during a run of the timer. TC11CR can be set correctly only at initialization (after reset). When the timer stops during PPG, TC11CR can not be set correctly from this point onward if the PPG output has the level which is inverted of the level when the timer starts. (Setting TC11CR specifies the timer F/F1 to the level inverted of the programmed value.) Therefore, the timer F/F1 needs to be initialized to ensure an arbitrary level of the PPG output. To initialize the timer F/F1, change TC11CR to the timer mode (it is not required to start the timer mode), and then set the PPG mode. Set TC11CR at this time. Note 3: In the PPG mode, the following relationship must be satisfied. TC11DRA > TC11DRB Note 4: Set TC11DRB after changing the mode of TC11M to the PPG mode.
Page 108
TMP86CS28FG
Example :Generating a pulse which is high-going for 800 s and low-going for 200 s (fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port LD LDW LDW LD (TC11CR), 10000111B (TC11DRA), 007DH (TC11DRB), 0019H (TC11CR), 10010111B ; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock ; Sets the cycle (1 ms / 27/fc ms = 007DH) ; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 s / 27/fc = 0019H) ; Starts the timer
Example :After stopping PPG, setting the PPG pin to a high-level to restart PPG (fc = 16 MHz)
Setting port LD LDW LDW LD : LD LD LD LD (TC11CR), 10000111B (TC11DRA), 007DH (TC11DRB), 0019H (TC11CR), 10010111B : (TC11CR), 10000111B (TC11CR), 10000100B (TC11CR), 00000111B (TC11CR), 00010111B ; Stops the timer ; Sets the timer mode ; Sets the PPG mode, TFF11 = 0 ; Starts the timer ; Sets the PPG mode, selects the source clock ; Sets the cycle (1 ms / 27/fc s = 007DH) ; Sets the low-level pulse width (200 s / 27/fc = 0019H) ; Starts the timer
I/O port output latch shared with PPG output Data output D R Q
Port output enable PPG pin
Function output TC11CR Write to TC11CR Internal reset Match to TC11DRB Match to TC11DRA Set Clear Toggle Timer F/F11 INTTC11 interrupt request TC11CR clear Q
Figure 8-15 PPG Output
Page 109
8. 16-Bit TimerCounter (TC10,TC11)
8.2 16-Bit TimerCounter 11 TMP86CS28FG
Timer start
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
n
n+1
m0
1
2
TC11DRB
n
Match detect TC11DRA
m
PPG pin output INTTC11 interrupt request Note: m > n (a) Continuous pulse generation (TC11S = 01)
Count start
TC11 pin input
Trigger
Internal clock
Counter
0
1
n
n+1
m
0
TC11DRB
n
TC11DRA
m
PPG pin output INTTC11 interrupt request [Application] One-shot pulse output (b) One-shot pulse generation (TC11S = 10) Note: m > n
Figure 8-16 PPG Mode Timing Chart
Page 110
TMP86CS28FG
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC4 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC4 pin TC4M TC4S TFF4
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC4S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F4
PDO4/PWM4/ PPG4 pin
TC4CK TC4CR TTREG4 PWREG4
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF4
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC3S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
TC3 pin TC3M TC3S TFF3
fc/2 fc
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC3 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F3
PDO3/PWM3/ pin
TC3CK TC3CR TTREG3 PWREG3
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF3
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 9-1 8-Bit TimerCounter 3, 4
Page 111
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
9.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 3 is controlled by the TimerCounter 3 control register (TC3CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG3, PWREG3). TimerCounter 3 Timer Register
TTREG3 (0015H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG3 (0019H) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG3) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG3) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 3 Control Register
TC3CR (0009H) 7 TFF3 6 5 TC3CK 4 3 TC3S 2 1 TC3M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF3
Time F/F3 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8)
R/W
000 001 TC3CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC3S TC3 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC3M TC3M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC4M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC3S= 1 0), do not change the TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 settings. To start the timer operation (TC3S= 0 1), TC3M, TC3CK and TFF3 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC4CR, where TC3M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4CR and TC4CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 9-1 and Table 9-2.
Page 112
TMP86CS28FG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 113
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
The TimerCounter 4 is controlled by the TimerCounter 4 control register (TC4CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG4 and PWREG4). TimerCounter 4 Timer Register
TTREG4 (0016H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG4 (001AH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG4) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG4) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 4 Control Register
TC4CR (000AH) 7 TFF4 6 5 TC4CK 4 3 TC4S 2 1 TC4M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF4
Timer F/F4 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC4 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC4CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC4S TC4 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC4M TC4M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC4S= 1 0), do not change the TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 settings. To start the timer operation (TC4S= 0 1), TC4M, TC4CK and TFF4 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC4M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC3 overflow signal regardless of the TC4CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC4M, where TC3CR must be set to 011.
Page 114
TMP86CS28FG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC3CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC4S and TFF4, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 9-1 and Table 9-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 93.
Table 9-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 9-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC3 pin input - - - - - TC4 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC3CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 115
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
Table 9-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 256 (TTREG4, 3) 65535 2 (PWREG4, 3) 65534 1 (PWREG4, 3) < (TTREG4, 3) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG4, 3) + 1 < (TTREG4, 3) Register Value
Note: n = 3 to 4
Page 116
TMP86CS28FG
9.3 Function
The TimerCounter 3 and 4 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 (TC3, 4) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
9.3.1
8-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 3, 4 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Maximum Time Setting
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter4, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC4CR), 00010000B (TC4CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC4. (EIRE). 5 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG4), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 117
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
TC4CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG4
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 9.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3, 4)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
TC4CR TC4 pin input
Counter
TTREG4
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC4) 9.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 118
TMP86CS28FG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC4 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG4), 3DH (TC4CR), 00010001B (TC4CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC4.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Page 119
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 9-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 120
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG4
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
Set F/F
PDO4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86CS28FG
TMP86CS28FG
9.3.4
8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3, 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 3, 4
Table 9-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 121
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG4
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG4
PWREG4
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 9-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC4)
Page 122
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
n
p
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86CS28FG
TMP86CS28FG
9.3.5
16-Bit Timer Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the lower byte and upper byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
Table 9-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Maximum Time Setting fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC3CR), 13H :Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRE). 5 : Enables INTTC4 interrupt. (TTREG3), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC4CR), 04H (TC4CR), 0CH
TC4CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG3 (Lower byte) TTREG4 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC4 interrupt request
Figure 9-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 123
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
9.3.6
16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC3 and 4)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC3 pin. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, an INTTC4 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC3 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/ 2 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG3), and upper byte (TTREG4) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
4 Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 3, 4
9.3.7
16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4 logic level.) Since PWREG4 and 3 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG4 and 3 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG4 and 3 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG4 and 3. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG4 and 3. Set the lower byte (PWREG3) and upper byte (PWREG4) in this order to program PWREG4 and 3. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG4 and 3 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG4 and 3. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG4 and 3, reading data of PWREG4 and 3 is previous value until INTTC4 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG4 and 3 immediately after the INTTC4 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC4 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWM4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 124
TMP86CS28FG
CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC4CR).7 : Sets the PWM4 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM4 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 9-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2s 8.2 ms 4.1 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 056H (TC4CR), 05EH
Page 125
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG3
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG3
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG4
n
m
p
Write to PWREG4
Figure 9-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 126
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F4
PWM4 pin
an
cp
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86CS28FG
TMP86CS28FG
9.3.8
16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC3 and 4)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG3, PWREG4) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F4 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG3, TTREG4) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC4 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC3 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/ 2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F4 by TC4CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F4 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG4 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F4.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG3 TTREG4, PWREG3 PWREG4) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG3), 07D0H (TTREG3), 8002H (TC3CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF4 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC4CR), 057H (TC4CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG4 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC4CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC4CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG4 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC4CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC4CR).7: Sets the PPG4 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 3, 4
Page 127
9.1 Configuration
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
TC4CR
TC4CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG3 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 9-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC3 and TC4)
Page 128
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG4 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG3 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG4 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F4
PPG4 pin
INTTC4 interrupt request
TMP86CS28FG
TMP86CS28FG
9.3.9
Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 3 and 4 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCounter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG4 and 3 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 3, 4
9.3.9.1
Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock.
Table 9-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Minimum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR SET (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRE). 5 (SYSCR2).6 (TC3CR), 43H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 : Starts TC4 and 3.
CLR RETI : VINTTC4: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 129
9. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC3, TC4)
9.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
9.3.9.2
High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG4, 3) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC4CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC4 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC4 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock.
Table 9-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time Setting (TTREG4, 3 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC4 and 3, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC3CR), 63H (TC4CR), 05H (TTREG3), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF3=0, source clock fc, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF4=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRE). 5 : Enables the INTTC4. : IMF 1 (TC4CR).3 : (TC4CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC4 and 3. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC4 and 3.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC4: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC4: DW : PINTTC4 : INTTC4 vector table
Page 130
TMP86CS28FG
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration
PWM mode
Overflow
fc/211 or fs/23 INTTC6 interrupt request
fc/2 5 fc/2 fc/23
fs
7
fc/2 fc
TC6 pin TC6M TC6S TFF6
A B C D E F G H S
Y
A B S
Y
Clear
8-bit up-counter
TC6S
PDO, PPG mode
A 16-bit mode
16-bit mode
Y B S S A Y B
Timer, Event Counter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F6
PDO6/PWM6/ PPG6 pin
TC6CK TC6CR TTREG6 PWREG6
PWM, PPG mode
DecodeEN
TFF6
PDO, PWM, PPG mode
16-bit mode
TC5S
PWM mode
fc/211 or fs/23
fc/27 5 fc/2 3 fc/2
fs
TC5 pin TC5M TC5S TFF5
fc/2 fc
A B C D E F G H S
Clear Y
8-bit up-counter Overflow 16-bit mode PDO mode
INTTC5 interrupt request
16-bit mode Timer, Event Couter mode
Toggle Q Set Clear
Timer F/F5
PDO5/PWM5/ pin
TC5CK TC5CR TTREG5 PWREG5
PWM mode
DecodeEN
TFF5
PDO, PWM mode 16-bit mode
Figure 10-1 8-Bit TimerCounter 5, 6
Page 131
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
10.2 TimerCounter Control
The TimerCounter 5 is controlled by the TimerCounter 5 control register (TC5CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG5, PWREG5). TimerCounter 5 Timer Register
TTREG5 (0017H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG5 (001BH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG5) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG5) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 5 Control Register
TC5CR (000BH) 7 TFF5 6 5 TC5CK 4 3 TC5S 2 1 TC5M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF5
Time F/F5 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - fc (Note 8)
R/W
000 001 TC5CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC5S TC5 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: TC5M TC5M operating mode select 010: 011: 1**:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
R/W
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit mode (Each mode is selectable with TC6M.) Reserved
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock[Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC5S= 1 0), do not change the TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 settings. To start the timer operation (TC5S= 0 1), TC5M, TC5CK and TFF5 can be programmed. Note 4: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, set the operating mode by programming TC6CR, where TC5M must be fixed to 011. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CK. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6CR and TC6CR, respectively. Note 6: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2.
Page 132
TMP86CS28FG
Note 7: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103. Note 8: The operating clock fc in the SLOW or SLEEP mode can be used only as the high-frequency warm-up mode.
Page 133
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
The TimerCounter 6 is controlled by the TimerCounter 6 control register (TC6CR) and two 8-bit timer registers (TTREG6 and PWREG6). TimerCounter 6 Timer Register
TTREG6 (0018H) R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
PWREG6 (001CH) R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 (Initial value: 1111 1111)
Note 1: Do not change the timer register (TTREG6) setting while the timer is running. Note 2: Do not change the timer register (PWREG6) setting in the operating mode except the 8-bit and 16-bit PWM modes while the timer is running.
TimerCounter 6 Control Register
TC6CR (000CH) 7 TFF6 6 5 TC6CK 4 3 TC6S 2 1 TC6M 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TFF6
Timer F/F6 control
0: 1:
Clear Set NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc TC6 pin input
3
R/W SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - fs - - R/W
000 001 TC6CK Operating clock selection [Hz] 010 011 100 101 110 111 TC6S TC6 start control 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: TC6M TC6M operating mode select 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/2 fs fc/2 fc
3
Operation stop and counter clear Operation start 8-bit timer/event counter mode 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO) mode 8-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode Reserved 16-bit timer/event counter mode Warm-up counter mode 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output mode 16-bit PPG mode
R/W
R/W
Note 1: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz] fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings while the timer is running. Note 3: To stop the timer operation (TC6S= 1 0), do not change the TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 settings. To start the timer operation (TC6S= 0 1), TC6M, TC6CK and TFF6 can be programmed. Note 4: When TC6M= 1** (upper byte in the 16-bit mode), the source clock becomes the TC5 overflow signal regardless of the TC6CK setting. Note 5: To use the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the operating mode by programming TC6M, where TC5CR must be set to 011.
Page 134
TMP86CS28FG
Note 6: To the TimerCounter in the 16-bit mode, select the source clock by programming TC5CR. Set the timer start control and timer F/F control by programming TC6S and TFF6, respectively. Note 7: The operating clock settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 10-1 and Table 10-2. Note 8: The timer register settings are limited depending on the timer operating mode. For the detailed descriptions, see Table 103.
Table 10-1 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (NORMAL1/2 and IDLE1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input - - - - - TC6 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note 1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note 2: : Available source clock
Table 10-2 Operating Mode and Selectable Source Clock (SLOW1/2 and SLEEP1/2 Modes)
Operating mode fc/211 or fs/23 8-bit timer 8-bit event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer 16-bit event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 16-bit PPG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc TC5 pin input - - - - - TC6 pin input - - - - - - - -
Note1: For 16-bit operations (16-bit timer/event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit PWM and 16-bit PPG), set its source clock on lower bit (TC5CK). Note2: : Available source clock
Page 135
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
Table 10-3 Constraints on Register Values Being Compared
Operating mode 8-bit timer/event counter 8-bit PDO 8-bit PWM 16-bit timer/event counter Warm-up counter 16-bit PWM 1 (TTREGn) 255 1 (TTREGn) 255 2 (PWREGn) 254 1 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 256 (TTREG6, 5) 65535 2 (PWREG6, 5) 65534 1 (PWREG6, 5) < (TTREG6, 5) 65535 16-bit PPG and (PWREG6, 5) + 1 < (TTREG6, 5) Register Value
Note: n = 5 to 6
Page 136
TMP86CS28FG
10.3 Function
The TimerCounter 5 and 6 have the 8-bit timer, 8-bit event counter, 8-bit programmable divider output (PDO), 8bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output modes. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 (TC5, 6) are cascadable to form a 16bit timer. The 16-bit timer has the operating modes such as the 16-bit timer, 16-bit event counter, warm-up counter, 16-bit pulse width modulation (PWM) output and 16-bit programmable pulse generation (PPG) modes.
10.3.1 8-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register j (TTREGj) value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting.
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 10-4 Source Clock for TimerCounter 5, 6 (Internal Clock)
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - Resolution Maximum Time Setting
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
fc = 16 MHz
fs = 32.768 kHz
128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns
244.14 s - - -
32.6 ms 2.0 ms 510 s 127.5 s
62.3 ms - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz and generating an interrupt 80 s later (TimerCounter6, fc = 16.0 MHz)
LD DI SET EI LD LD (TC6CR), 00010000B (TC6CR), 00011000B : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit timer mode. : Starts TC6. (EIRD). 0 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG6), 0AH : Sets the timer register (80 s/27/fc = 0AH).
Page 137
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
TC6CR
Internal Source Clock Counter
TTREG6
1
2
3
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-2 8-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 10.3.2 8-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5, 6)
In the 8-bit event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, an INTTCj interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TCj pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TCj pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 Hz in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode.
Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
TC6CR TC6 pin input
Counter
TTREG6
0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
n-1
n0
1
2
0
?
n
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-3 8-Bit Event Counter Mode Timing Chart (TC6) 10.3.3 8-Bit Programmable Divider Output (PDO) Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse with a 50% duty cycle from the PDOj pin. In the PDO mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the TTREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the PDOj pin is switched to the opposite state and the up-counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at the time. The logic state opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level is output from the PDOj pin. An arbitrary value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj value is initialized to 0. To use the programmable divider output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Page 138
TMP86CS28FG
Example :Generating 1024 Hz pulse using TC6 (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting port LD LD LD (TTREG6), 3DH (TC6CR), 00010001B (TC6CR), 00011001B : 1/1024/27/fc/2 = 3DH : Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 8-bit PDO mode. : Starts TC6.
Note 1: In the programmable divider output mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the programmable divider output mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming. Therefore, if TTREGi is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PDO output, the PDOj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR setting upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PDOj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PDOj pin to the high level. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Page 139
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "1"
Internal source clock n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 n0 1 2 3 0
Figure 10-4 8-Bit PDO Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Match detect Match detect Match detect
Page 140
Counter
0
1
2
TTREG6
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
Set F/F
PDO6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
Held at the level when the timer is stopped
TMP86CS28FG
TMP86CS28FG
10.3.4 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5, 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 8 bits of resolution. The up-counter counts up using the internal clock. When a match between the up-counter and the PWREGj value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/Fj is switched to the opposite state again by the up-counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTCj interrupt request is generated at this time. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/Fj by TCjCR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/Fj is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWMj pin is the opposite to the timer F/Fj logic level.) Since PWREGj in the PWM mode is serially connected to the shift register, the value set to PWREGj can be changed while the timer is running. The value set to PWREGj during a run of the timer is shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREGj. While the timer is stopped, the value is shifted immediately after the programming of PWREGj. If executing the read instruction to PWREGj during PWM output, the value in the shift register is read, but not the value set in PWREGj. Therefore, after writing to PWREGj, the reading data of PWREGj is previous value until INTTCj is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREGj immediately after the INTTCj interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTCj interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of the pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTCj interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWMj pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TCjCR after the timer is stopped. Do not change the TCjCR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWMj pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TCjCR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TCjCR).7: Sets the PWMj pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode during PWM output, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWMj pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode. Note 4: j = 5, 6
Table 10-5 PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
Resolution SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - -
Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 32.8 ms 2.05 ms 512 s 128 s 7.81 ms 32 s 16 s fs = 32.768 kHz 62.5 ms - - - 7.81 ms - -
DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/2 fc/2
7 5
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
fc/23 fs fc/2 fc
Page 141
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock n
Write to PWREG6
Counter
0
1
n+1
FF
0
1
n
n+1
FF
0
1
m
m+1
FF
0
1
p
Write to PWREG6
PWREG6
? Shift Shift m
Match detect
n
m
p Shift p
Match detect Match detect
Figure 10-5 8-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC6)
Page 142
n One cycle period m
Shift
Shift registar
?
n
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
n
p
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86CS28FG
TMP86CS28FG
10.3.5 16-Bit Timer Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the timer mode, the up-counter counts up using the internal clock. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit timer. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter continues counting. Program the lower byte and upper byte in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
Note 1: In the timer mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj, and PPGj pins may output a pulse. Note 2: In the timer mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the timer mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after programming of TTREGj. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
Table 10-6 Source Clock for 16-Bit Timer Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 DV7CK = 1 fs/23 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 - - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - Maximum Time Setting fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - -
Example :Setting the timer mode with source clock fc/27 Hz, and generating an interrupt 300 ms later (fc = 16.0 MHz)
LDW DI SET EI LD (TC5CR), 13H :Sets the operating clock to fc/27, and 16-bit timer mode (lower byte). : Sets the 16-bit timer mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer. (EIRD). 0 : Enables INTTC6 interrupt. (TTREG5), 927CH : Sets the timer register (300 ms/27/fc = 927CH).
LD LD
(TC6CR), 04H (TC6CR), 0CH
TC6CR
Internal source clock Counter
TTREG5 (Lower byte) TTREG6 (Upper byte)
0
1
2
3
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
mn-1 mn 0
1
2
0
?
n
?
m
Match detect Counter clear Match detect Counter clear
INTTC6 interrupt request
Figure 10-6 16-Bit Timer Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 143
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
10.3.6 16-Bit Event Counter Mode (TC5 and 6)
In the event counter mode, the up-counter counts up at the falling edge to the TC5 pin. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit event counter. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, an INTTC6 interrupt is generated and the up-counter is cleared. After being cleared, the up-counter restarts counting at the falling edge of the input pulse to the TC5 pin. Two machine cycles are required for the low- or high-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/ 2 in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Program the lower byte (TTREG5), and upper byte (TTREG6) in this order in the timer register. (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.)
4 Note 1: In the event counter mode, fix TCjCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOj, PWMj and PPGj pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the event counter mode, do not change the TTREGj setting while the timer is running. Since TTREGj is not in the shift register configuration in the event counter mode, the new value programmed in TTREGj is in effect immediately after the programming. Therefore, if TTREGj is changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 3: j = 5, 6
10.3.7 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signals with up to 16 bits of resolution. The TimerCounter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form the 16-bit PWM signal generator. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again by the counter overflow, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PWM6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6 logic level.) Since PWREG6 and 5 in the PWM mode are serially connected to the shift register, the values set to PWREG6 and 5 can be changed while the timer is running. The values set to PWREG6 and 5 during a run of the timer are shifted by the INTTCj interrupt request and loaded into PWREG6 and 5. While the timer is stopped, the values are shifted immediately after the programming of PWREG6 and 5. Set the lower byte (PWREG5) and upper byte (PWREG6) in this order to program PWREG6 and 5. (Programming only the lower or upper byte of the register should not be attempted.) If executing the read instruction to PWREG6 and 5 during PWM output, the values set in the shift register is read, but not the values set in PWREG6 and 5. Therefore, after writing to the PWREG6 and 5, reading data of PWREG6 and 5 is previous value until INTTC6 is generated. For the pin used for PWM output, the output latch of the I/O port must be set to 1.
Note 1: In the PWM mode, program the timer register PWREG6 and 5 immediately after the INTTC6 interrupt request is generated (normally in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine.) If the programming of PWREGj and the interrupt request occur at the same time, an unstable value is shifted, that may result in generation of pulse different from the programmed value until the next INTTC6 interrupt request is generated. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PWM output, the PWM6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not program TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PWM6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped
Page 144
TMP86CS28FG
CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer. CLR (TC6CR).7 : Sets the PWM6 pin to the high level. Note 3: To enter the STOP mode, stop the timer and then enter the STOP mode. If the STOP mode is entered without stopping of the timer when fc, fc/2 or fs is selected as the source clock, a pulse is output from the PWM6 pin during the warm-up period time after exiting the STOP mode.
Table 10-7 16-Bit PWM Output Mode
Source Clock NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 fc/211 fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc DV7CK = 1 fs/23 [Hz] fc/27 fc/25 fc/23 fs fc/2 fc SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode fs/23 [Hz] - - - fs - - Resolution fc = 16 MHz 128 s 8 s 2 s 500 ns 30.5 s 125 ns 62.5 ns fs = 32.768 kHz 244.14 s - - - 30.5 s - - Repeated Cycle fc = 16 MHz 8.39 s 524.3 ms 131.1 ms 32.8 ms 2s 8.2 ms 4.1 ms fs = 32.768 kHz 16 s - - - 2s - -
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 32.768 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and 16-bit PWM output mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PWM signal generation mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 056H (TC6CR), 05EH
Page 145
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Internal source clock an
Write to PWREG5
Counter
0
1
an+1
FFFF
0
1
an
an+1
FFFF
0
1
bm bm+1
Write to PWREG5
FFFF
0
1
cp
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
Write to PWREG6
n
m
p
Write to PWREG6
Figure 10-7 16-Bit PWM Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 146
b Shift Shift bm
Match detect an One cycle period bm
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
a
c Shift cp
Match detect Match detect
Shift
16-bit shift register
?
an
Match detect
Timer F/F6
PWM6 pin
an
cp
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86CS28FG
TMP86CS28FG
10.3.8 16-Bit Programmable Pulse Generate (PPG) Output Mode (TC5 and 6)
This mode is used to generate pulses with up to 16-bits of resolution. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to enter the 16-bit PPG mode. The counter counts up using the internal clock or external clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (PWREG5, PWREG6) value is detected, the logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state. The counter continues counting. The logic level output from the timer F/F6 is switched to the opposite state again when a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG5, TTREG6) value is detected, and the counter is cleared. The INTTC6 interrupt is generated at this time. Two machine cycles are required for the high- or low-level pulse input to the TC5 pin. Therefore, a maximum frequency to be supplied is fc/24 Hz in the NORMAL1/2 or IDLE1/2 mode, and fs/24 to in the SLOW1/ 2 or SLEEP1/2 mode. Since the initial value can be set to the timer F/F6 by TC6CR, positive and negative pulses can be generated. Upon reset, the timer F/F6 is cleared to 0. (The logic level output from the PPG6 pin is the opposite to the timer F/F6.) Set the lower byte and upper byte in this order to program the timer register. (TTREG5 TTREG6, PWREG5 PWREG6) (Programming only the upper or lower byte should not be attempted.) For PPG output, set the output latch of the I/O port to 1.
Example :Generating a pulse with 1-ms high-level width and a period of 16.385 ms (fc = 16.0 MHz)
Setting ports LDW LDW LD (PWREG5), 07D0H (TTREG5), 8002H (TC5CR), 33H : Sets the pulse width. : Sets the cycle period. : Sets the operating clock to fc/23, and16-bit PPG mode (lower byte). : Sets TFF6 to the initial value 0, and 16-bit PPG mode (upper byte). : Starts the timer.
LD LD
(TC6CR), 057H (TC6CR), 05FH
Note 1: In the PPG mode, do not change the PWREGi and TTREGi settings while the timer is running. Since PWREGi and TTREGi are not in the shift register configuration in the PPG mode, the new values programmed in PWREGi and TTREGi are in effect immediately after programming PWREGi and TTREGi. Therefore, if PWREGi and TTREGi are changed while the timer is running, an expected operation may not be obtained. Note 2: When the timer is stopped during PPG output, the PPG6 pin holds the output status when the timer is stopped. To change the output status, program TC6CR after the timer is stopped. Do not change TC6CR upon stopping of the timer. Example: Fixing the PPG6 pin to the high level when the TimerCounter is stopped CLR (TC6CR).3: Stops the timer CLR (TC6CR).7: Sets the PPG6 pin to the high level Note 3: i = 5, 6
Page 147
10.1 Configuration
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
TC6CR
TC6CR
Write of "0"
Internal source clock 1 mn mn+1 qr-1 qr 0 1 mn mn+1 1 qr-1 qr 0 mn mn+1 0
Counter
0
PWREG5 (Lower byte)
?
n
Figure 10-8 16-Bit PPG Mode Timing Chart (TC5 and TC6)
Page 148
Match detect Match detect Match detect mn mn
PWREG6 (Upper byte)
?
m
Match detect
Match detect
TTREG5 (Lower byte)
?
r
TTREG6 (Upper byte)
?
q F/F clear Held at the level when the timer stops
mn
Timer F/F6
PPG6 pin
INTTC6 interrupt request
TMP86CS28FG
TMP86CS28FG
10.3.9 Warm-Up Counter Mode
In this mode, the warm-up period time is obtained to assure oscillation stability when the system clocking is switched between the high-frequency and low-frequency. The timer counter 5 and 6 are cascadable to form a 16-bit TimerCounter. The warm-up counter mode has two types of mode; switching from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and vice-versa.
Note 1: In the warm-up counter mode, fix TCiCR to 0. If not fixed, the PDOi, PWMi and PPGi pins may output pulses. Note 2: In the warm-up counter mode, only upper 8 bits of the timer register TTREG6 and 5 are used for match detection and lower 8 bits are not used. Note 3: i = 5, 6
10.3.9.1 Low-Frequency Warm-up Counter Mode (NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW2 SLOW1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the low-frequency clock fs to oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the low-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, set SYSCR2 to 1 to switch the system clock from the high-frequency to low-frequency, and then clear of SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the high-frequency clock. Table 10-8 Setting Time of Low-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (fs = 32.768 kHz)
Minimum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 7.81 ms Maximum Time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 1.99 s
Example :After checking low-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the SLOW1 mode
SET LD LD LD DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR SET (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 1 (Switches the system clock to the low-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the high-frequency clock.) (EIRD). 0 (SYSCR2).6 (TC5CR), 43H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 8000H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fs, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 : Starts TC6 and 5.
CLR RETI : VINTTC6: DW
(SYSCR2).7
: PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 149
10. 8-Bit TimerCounter (TC5, TC6)
10.1 Configuration TMP86CS28FG
10.3.9.2 High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode (SLOW1 SLOW2 NORMAL2 NORMAL1)
In this mode, the warm-up period time from a stop of the high-frequency clock fc to the oscillation stability is obtained. Before starting the timer, set SYSCR2 to 1 to oscillate the high-frequency clock. When a match between the up-counter and the timer register (TTREG6, 5) value is detected after the timer is started by setting TC6CR to 1, the counter is cleared by generating the INTTC6 interrupt request. After stopping the timer in the INTTC6 interrupt service routine, clear SYSCR2 to 0 to switch the system clock from the low-frequency to high-frequency, and then SYSCR2 to 0 to stop the low-frequency clock. Table 10-9 Setting Time in High-Frequency Warm-Up Counter Mode
Minimum time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = 0100H) 16 s Maximum time Setting (TTREG6, 5 = FF00H) 4.08 ms
Example :After checking high-frequency clock oscillation stability with TC6 and 5, switching to the NORMAL1 mode
SET LD LD LD (SYSCR2).7 (TC5CR), 63H (TC6CR), 05H (TTREG5), 0F800H : SYSCR2 1 : Sets TFF5=0, source clock fc, and 16-bit mode. : Sets TFF6=0, and warm-up counter mode. : Sets the warm-up time. (The warm-up time depends on the oscillator characteristic.) : IMF 0 (EIRD). 0 : Enables the INTTC6. : IMF 1 (TC6CR).3 : (TC6CR).3 (SYSCR2).5 : Stops the TC6 and 5. : SYSCR2 0 (Switches the system clock to the high-frequency clock.) : SYSCR2 0 (Stops the low-frequency clock.) : Starts the TC6 and 5.
DI SET EI SET : PINTTC6: CLR CLR
CLR
(SYSCR2).6
RETI : VINTTC6: DW : PINTTC6 : INTTC6 vector table
Page 150
TMP86CS28FG
11. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
The TMP86CS28FG has a clocked-synchronous 8-bit serial interface. Serial interface has an 8-byte transmit and receive data buffer that can automatically and continuously transfer up to 64 bits of data. Serial interface is connected to outside peripherl devices via SO, SI, SCK port.
11.1 Configuration
SIO control / status register
SIOSR
SIOCR1
SIOCR2
CPU
Control circuit
Buffer control circuit Shift register Shift clock
Transmit and receive data buffer (8 bytes in DBR)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SO
Serial data output 8-bit transfer 4-bit transfer
SI
Serial data input
INTSIO interrupt request
Serial clock
SCK
Serial clock I/O
Figure 11-1 Serial Interface
Page 151
11. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
11.2 Control TMP86CS28FG
11.2 Control
The serial interface is controlled by SIO control registers (SIOCR1/SIOCR2). The serial interface status can be determined by reading SIO status register (SIOSR). The transmit and receive data buffer is controlled by the SIOCR2. The data buffer is assigned to address 0F60H to 0F67H for SIO in the DBR area, and can continuously transfer up to 8 words (bytes or nibbles) at one time. When the specified number of words has been transferred, a buffer empty (in the transmit mode) or a buffer full (in the receive mode or transmit/receive mode) interrupt (INTSIO) is generated. When the internal clock is used as the serial clock in the 8-bit receive mode and the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, a fixed interval wait can be applied to the serial clock for each word transferred. Four different wait times can be selected with SIOCR2. SIO Control Register 1
SIOCR1 (0F68H) 7 SIOS 6 SIOINH 5 4 SIOM 3 2 1 SCK 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
SIOS
Indicate transfer start / stop
0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 010:
Stop Start Continuously transfer Abort transfer (Automatically cleared after abort) 8-bit transmit mode 4-bit transmit mode 8-bit transmit / receive mode 8-bit receive mode 4-bit receive mode Write only
SIOINH
Continue / abort transfer
SIOM
Transfer mode select
100: 101: 110:
Except the above: Reserved NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 000 001 SCK Serial clock select 010 011 100 101 110 111 fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 Reserved External clock ( Input from SCK pin ) SLOW1/2 SLEEP1/2 mode fs/25 Write only
Note 1: fc; High-frequency clock [Hz], fs; Low-frequency clock [Hz] Note 2: Set SIOS to "0" and SIOINH to "1" when setting the transfer mode or serial clock. Note 3: SIOCR1 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Control Register 2
SIOCR2 (0F69H) 7 6 5 4 WAIT 3 2 1 BUF 0 (Initial value: ***0 0000)
Page 152
TMP86CS28FG
Always sets "00" except 8-bit transmit / receive mode. 00: WAIT Wait control 01: 10: 11: 000: 001: 010: BUF Number of transfer words (Buffer address in use) 011: 100: 101: 110: 111: Tf = TD(Non wait) Tf = 2TD(Wait) Tf = 4TD(Wait) Tf = 8TD (Wait) 1 word transfer 2 words transfer 3 words transfer 4 words transfer 5 words transfer 6 words transfer 7 words transfer 8 words transfer 0F60H 0F60H ~ 0F61H 0F60H ~ 0F62H 0F60H ~ 0F63H 0F60H ~ 0F64H 0F60H ~ 0F65H 0F60H ~ 0F66H 0F60H ~ 0F67H Write only
Note 1: The lower 4 bits of each buffer are used during 4-bit transfers. Zeros (0) are stored to the upper 4bits when receiving. Note 2: Transmitting starts at the lowest address. Received data are also stored starting from the lowest address to the highest address. ( The first buffer address transmitted is 0F60H ). Note 3: The value to be loaded to BUF is held after transfer is completed. Note 4: SIOCR2 must be set when the serial interface is stopped (SIOF = 0). Note 5: *: Don't care Note 6: SIOCR2 is write-only register, which cannot access any of in read-modify-write instruction such as bit operate, etc.
SIO Status Register
SIOSR (0F69H) 7 SIOF 6 SEF 5 4 3 2 1 0
SIOF SEF
Serial transfer operating status monitor Shift operating status monitor
0: 1: 0: 1:
Transfer terminated Transfer in process Shift operation terminated Shift operation in process
Read only
Note 1: Tf; Frame time, TD; Data transfer time Note 2: After SIOS is cleared to "0", SIOF is cleared to "0" at the termination of transfer or the setting of SIOINH to "1".
(output)
SCK output
TD Tf
Figure 11-2 Frame time (Tf) and Data transfer time (TD)
11.3 Serial clock
11.3.1 Clock source
Internal clock or external clock for the source clock is selected by SIOCR1.
Page 153
11. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
11.3 Serial clock TMP86CS28FG
11.3.1.1 Internal clock
Any of six frequencies can be selected. The serial clock is output to the outside on the SCK pin. The SCK pin goes high when transfer starts. When data writing (in the transmit mode) or reading (in the receive mode or the transmit/receive mode) cannot keep up with the serial clock rate, there is a wait function that automatically stops the serial clock and holds the next shift operation until the read/write processing is completed. Table 11-1 Serial Clock Rate
NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 SCK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 Clock fc/213 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External Baud Rate 1.91 Kbps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External Clock fs/25 fc/28 fc/27 fc/26 fc/25 fc/24 External DV7CK = 1 Baud Rate 1024 bps 61.04 Kbps 122.07 Kbps 244.14 Kbps 488.28 Kbps 976.56 Kbps External SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 mode Clock fs/25 External Baud Rate 1024 bps External
Note: 1 Kbit = 1024 bit (fc = 16 MHz, fs = 32.768 kHz)
Automatically wait function
SCK
pin (output)
SO
pin (output) Written transmit data a
a0
a1
a2
a3 b
b0
b1 c
b2
b3
c0
c1
Figure 11-3 Automatic Wait Function (at 4-bit transmit mode)
11.3.1.2 External clock
An external clock connected to the SCK pin is used as the serial clock. In this case, output latch of this port should be set to "1". To ensure shifting, a pulse width of at least 4 machine cycles is required. This pulse is needed for the shift operation to execute certainly. Actually, there is necessary processing time for interrupting, writing, and reading. The minimum pulse is determined by setting the mode and the program. Therfore, maximum transfer frequency will be 488.3K bit/sec (at fc=16MHz).
SCK
pin (Output)
tSCKL tSCKH
tcyc = 4/fc (In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) 4/fs (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes) tSCKL, tSCKH > 4tcyc
Figure 11-4 External clock pulse width
Page 154
TMP86CS28FG
11.3.2 Shift edge
The leading edge is used to transmit, and the trailing edge is used to receive.
11.3.2.1 Leading edge
Transmitted data are shifted on the leading edge of the serial clock (falling edge of the SCK pin input/ output).
11.3.2.2 Trailing edge
Received data are shifted on the trailing edge of the serial clock (rising edge of the SCK pin input/output).
SCK pin
SO pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
3210
*321
**32
***3
(a) Leading edge
SCK pin
SI pin
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Shift register
****
0***
10**
210*
3210
*; Don't care
(b) Trailing edge
Figure 11-5 Shift edge
11.4 Number of bits to transfer
Either 4-bit or 8-bit serial transfer can be selected. When 4-bit serial transfer is selected, only the lower 4 bits of the transmit/receive data buffer register are used. The upper 4 bits are cleared to "0" when receiving. The data is transferred in sequence starting at the least significant bit (LSB).
11.5 Number of words to transfer
Up to 8 words consisting of 4 bits of data (4-bit serial transfer) or 8 bits (8-bit serial transfer) of data can be transferred continuously. The number of words to be transferred can be selected by SIOCR2. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the specified number of words has been transferred. If the number of words is to be changed during transfer, the serial interface must be stopped before making the change. The number of words can be changed during automatic-wait operation of an internal clock. In this case, the serial interface is not required to be stopped.
Page 155
11. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
11.6 Transfer Mode TMP86CS28FG
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
INTSIO interrupt
(a) 1 word transmit
SCK pin
SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(b) 3 words transmit
SCK pin
SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
b0
b1
b2
b3
c0
c1
c2
c3
INTSIO interrupt
(c) 3 words receive
Figure 11-6 Number of words to transfer (Example: 1word = 4bit)
11.6 Transfer Mode
SIOCR1 is used to select the transmit, receive, or transmit/receive mode.
11.6.1 4-bit and 8-bit transfer modes
In these modes, firstly set the SIO control register to the transmit mode, and then write first transmit data (number of transfer words to be transferred) to the data buffer registers (DBR). After the data are written, the transmission is started by setting SIOCR1 to "1". The data are then output sequentially to the SO pin in synchronous with the serial clock, starting with the least significant bit (LSB). As soon as the LSB has been output, the data are transferred from the data buffer register to the shift register. When the final data bit has been transferred and the data buffer register is empty, an INTSIO (Buffer empty) interrupt is generated to request the next transmitted data. When the internal clock is used, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated if the next transmitted data are not loaded to the data buffer register by the time the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transmitted. Writing even one word of data cancels the automatic-wait; therefore, when transmitting two or more words, always write the next word before transmission of the previous word is completed.
Note:Automatic waits are also canceled by writing to a DBR not being used as a transmit data buffer register; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications. For example, when 3 words are transmitted, do not use the DBR of the remained 5 words.
When an external clock is used, the data must be written to the data buffer register before shifting next data. Thus, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay time from the generation of the interrupt request to writing of the data to the data buffer register by the interrupt service program. The transmission is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer empty interrupt service program. Page 156
TMP86CS28FG
SIOCR1 is cleared, the operation will end after all bits of words are transmitted. That the transmission has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR because SIOSR is cleared to "0" when a transfer is completed. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmission is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". When an external clock is used, it is also necessary to clear SIOCR1 to "0" before shifting the next data; If SIOCR1 is not cleared before shift out, dummy data will be transmitted and the operation will end. If it is necessary to change the number of words, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0".
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 11-7 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Input) SO pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write Write (a) (b)
b
Figure 11-8 Transfer Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, External clock)
Page 157
11. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
11.6 Transfer Mode TMP86CS28FG
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
MSB of last word
tSODH = min 3.5/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 3.5/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 11-9 Transmiiied Data Hold Time at End of Transfer 11.6.2 4-bit and 8-bit receive modes
After setting the control registers to the receive mode, set SIOCR1 to "1" to enable receiving. The data are then transferred to the shift register via the SI pin in synchronous with the serial clock. When one word of data has been received, it is transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register (DBR). When the number of words specified with the SIOCR2 has been received, an INTSIO (Buffer full) interrupt is generated to request that these data be read out. The data are then read from the data buffer registers by the interrupt service program. When the internal clock is used, and the previous data are not read from the data buffer register before the next data are received, the serial clock will stop and an automatic-wait will be initiated until the data are read. A wait will not be initiated if even one data word has been read.
Note:Waits are also canceled by reading a DBR not being used as a received data buffer register is read; therefore, during SIO do not use such DBR for other applications.
When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, the previous data are read before the next data are transferred to the data buffer register. If the previous data have not been read, the next data will not be transferred to the data buffer register and the receiving of any more data will be canceled. When an external clock is used, the maximum transfer speed is determined by the delay between the time when the interrupt request is generated and when the data received have been read. The receiving is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in buffer full interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been received. That the receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the receiving is ended. After confirmed the receiving termination, the final receiving data is read. When SIOCR1 is set, the receiving is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". (The received data is ignored, and it is not required to be read out.) If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0" then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of data receiving, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before the received data is read out.
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Page 158
TMP86CS28FG
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (Output) SI pin
a0
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
INTSIO Interrupt
DBR
a
Read out
b
Read out
Figure 11-10 Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock) 11.6.3 8-bit transfer / receive mode
After setting the SIO control register to the 8-bit transmit/receive mode, write the data to be transmitted first to the data buffer registers (DBR). After that, enable the transmit/receive by setting SIOCR1 to "1". When transmitting, the data are output from the SO pin at leading edges of the serial clock. When receiving, the data are input to the SI pin at the trailing edges of the serial clock. When the all receive is enabled, 8-bit data are transferred from the shift register to the data buffer register. An INTSIO interrupt is generated when the number of data words specified with the SIOCR2 has been transferred. Usually, read the receive data from the buffer register in the interrupt service. The data buffer register is used for both transmitting and receiving; therefore, always write the data to be transmitted after reading the all received data. When the internal clock is used, a wait is initiated until the received data are read and the next transfer data are written. A wait will not be initiated if even one transfer data word has been written. When an external clock is used, the shift operation is synchronized with the external clock; therefore, it is necessary to read the received data and write the data to be transmitted next before starting the next shift operation. When an external clock is used, the transfer speed is determined by the maximum delay between generation of an interrupt request and the received data are read and the data to be transmitted next are written. The transmit/receive operation is ended by clearing SIOCR1 to "0" or setting SIOCR1 to "1" in INTSIO interrupt service program. When SIOCR1 is cleared, the current data are transferred to the buffer. After SIOCR1 cleared, the transmitting/receiving is ended at the time that the final bit of the data has been transmitted. That the transmitting/receiving has ended can be determined from the status of SIOSR. SIOSR is cleared to "0" when the transmitting/receiving is ended. When SIOCR1 is set, the transmit/receive operation is immediately ended and SIOSR is cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in external clock operation, SIOCR1 should be cleared to "0", then SIOCR2 must be rewritten after confirming that SIOSR has been cleared to "0". If it is necessary to change the number of words in internal clock, during automatic-wait operation which occurs after completion of transmit/receive operation, SIOCR2 must be rewritten before reading and writing of the receive/transmit data.
Page 159
11. Synchronous Serial Interface (SIO)
11.6 Transfer Mode TMP86CS28FG
Note:The buffer contents are lost when the transfer mode is switched. If it should become necessary to switch the transfer mode, end receiving by clearing SIOCR1 to "0", read the last data and then switch the transfer mode.
Clear SIOS
SIOCR1
SIOSR
SIOSR
SCK pin (output) SO pin
a0 c0
a1 c1
a2 c2
a3 c3
a4 c4
a5 c5
a6 c6
a7 c7
b0 d0
b1 d1
b2 d2
b3 d3
b4 d4
b5 d5
b6 d6
b7 d7
SI pin
INTSIO interrupt
DBR
a
Write (a) Read out (c)
c
b
Write (b)
d
Read out (d)
Figure 11-11 Transfer / Receive Mode (Example: 8bit, 1word transfer, Internal clock)
SCK pin
SIOSR
SO pin
Bit 6
Bit 7 of last word
tSODH = min 4/fc [s] ( In the NORMAL1/2, IDLE1/2 modes) tSODH = min 4/fs [s] (In the SLOW1/2, SLEEP1/2 modes)
Figure 11-12 Transmitted Data Hold Time at End of Transfer / Receive
Page 160
TMP86CS28FG
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UART1CR1
Transmit data buffer
TD1BUF
Receive data buffer
RD1BUF
3
2
Receive control circuit
2
Transmit control circuit Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit
RXD1
INTTXD1
INTRXD1
TXD1
Transmit/receive clock
Y M P X S 2 Y Counter
UART1SR
S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC5
A B C
fc/2 fc/27 8 fc/2
6
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
4 2
UART1CR2
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2 MPX: Multiplexer
Figure 12-1 UART1 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 161
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.2 Control TMP86CS28FG
12.2 Control
UART1 is controlled by the UART1 Control Registers (UART1CR1, UART1CR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UART1SR).
UART1 Control Register1
UART1CR1 (0FE8H) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 TC5 ( Input INTTC5) fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UART1CR1 and UART1CR1 should be set to "0" before UART1CR1 is changed.
UART1 Control Register2
UART1CR2 (0FE9H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejection time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UART1CR2 = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UART1CR2 = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UART1CR2 = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 162
TMP86CS28FG
UART1 Status Register
UART1SR (0FE8H) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART1 Receive Data Buffer
RD1BUF (0FEAH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART1 Transmit Data Buffer
TD1BUF (0FEAH) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 163
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.3 Transfer Data Format TMP86CS28FG
12.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART1, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UART1CR1), and parity (Select parity in UART1CR1; even- or odd-numbered parity by UART1CR1) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 12-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 12-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 12-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 164
TMP86CS28FG
12.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART1 is set of UART1CR1. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 12-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 4 MHz 19200 [baud] 9600 4800 2400 1200 600
When TC5 is used as the UART1 transfer rate (when UART1CR1 = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC5 source clock [Hz] / TTREG5 setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
12.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART1 receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UART1CR1 until a start bit is detected in RXD1 pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD1 pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD1 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD1 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 12-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 165
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.6 STOP Bit Length TMP86CS28FG
12.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UART1CR1.
12.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UART1CR1 and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UART1CR1.
12.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
12.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UART1CR1 to "1". Read UART1SR to check UART1SR = "1", then write data in TD1BUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TD1BUF zero-clears UART1SR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD1 pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UART1CR1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART1CR1. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UART1SR is set to "1" and an INTTXD1 interrupt is generated. While UART1CR1 = "0" and from when "1" is written to UART1CR1 to when send data are written to TD1BUF, the TXD1 pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UART1SR, then write data in TD1BUF. Otherwise, UART1SR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
12.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UART1CR1 to "1". When data are received via the RXD1 pin, the receive data are transferred to RD1BUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RD1BUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UART1SR is set and an INTRXD1 interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART1CR1. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RD1BUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RD1BUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UART1CR1 bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 166
TMP86CS28FG
12.9 Status Flag
12.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UART1SR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears PERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-5 Generation of Parity Error 12.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UART1SR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears FERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-6 Generation of Framing Error 12.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RD1BUF, overrun error flag UART1SR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RD1BUF are not affected. The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
Page 167
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.9 Status Flag TMP86CS28FG
UART1SR
RXD1 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD1BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UART1SR
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears OERR.
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UART1SR is cleared.
12.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RD1BUF sets receive data buffer full flag UART1SR to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the RD1BUF is read after reading the UART1SR.
RXD1 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD1BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UART1SR then RD1BUF clears RBFL.
UART1SR
INTRXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UART1SR is set during the period between reading the UART1SR and reading the RD1BUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RD1BUF. Therefore, after reading the RD1BUF, read the UART1SR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
12.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TD1BUF, that is, when data in TD1BUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the TD1BUF is written after reading the UART1SR.
Page 168
TMP86CS28FG
Data write
TD1BUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD1 pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UART1SR After reading UART1SR writing TD1BUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 12.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TD1BUF (UART1SR = "1"), transmit end flag UART1SR is set to "1". The UART1SR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is started after writing the TD1BUF.
Shift register
TXD1 pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TD1BUF
Start
Bit 0
UART1SR
UART1SR
INTTXD1 interrupt
Figure 12-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 169
12. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART1 )
12.9 Status Flag TMP86CS28FG
Page 170
TMP86CS28FG
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.1 Configuration
UART control register 1
UART0CR1
Transmit data buffer
TD0BUF
Receive data buffer
RD0BUF
3
2
Receive control circuit
2
Transmit control circuit Shift register
Shift register
Parity bit Stop bit
Noise rejection circuit
RXD0
INTTXD0
INTRXD0
TXD0
Transmit/receive clock
Y M P X S 2 Y Counter
UART0SR
S fc/13 fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416
INTTC3
A B C
fc/2 fc/27 8 fc/2
6
fc/96
A B C D E F G H
4 2
UART0CR2
UART status register Baud rate generator
UART control register 2 MPX: Multiplexer
Figure 13-1 UART0 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)
Page 171
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.2 Control TMP86CS28FG
13.2 Control
UART0 is controlled by the UART0 Control Registers (UART0CR1, UART0CR2). The operating status can be monitored using the UART status register (UART0SR).
UART0 Control Register1
UART0CR1 (0FE5H) 7 TXE 6 RXE 5 STBT 4 EVEN 3 PE 2 1 BRG 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
TXE RXE STBT EVEN PE
Transfer operation Receive operation Transmit stop bit length Even-numbered parity Parity addition
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Disable Enable Disable Enable 1 bit 2 bits Odd-numbered parity Even-numbered parity No parity Parity fc/13 [Hz] fc/26 fc/52 fc/104 fc/208 fc/416 TC3 ( Input INTTC3) fc/96 Write only
BRG
Transmit clock select
Note 1: When operations are disabled by setting TXE and RXE bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data transmit or receive complete. When the transmit data is stored in the transmit data buffer, the data are not transmitted. Even if data transmit is enabled, until new data are written to the transmit data buffer, the current data are not transmitted. Note 2: The transmit clock and the parity are common to transmit and receive. Note 3: UART0CR1 and UART0CR1 should be set to "0" before UART0CR1 is changed.
UART0 Control Register2
UART0CR2 (0FE6H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 RXDNC 1 0 STOPBR (Initial value: **** *000)
RXDNC
Selection of RXD input noise rejection time
00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1:
No noise rejection (Hysteresis input) Rejects pulses shorter than 31/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 63/fc [s] as noise Rejects pulses shorter than 127/fc [s] as noise 1 bit 2 bits
Write only
STOPBR
Receive stop bit length
Note: When UART0CR2 = "01", pulses longer than 96/fc [s] are always regarded as signals; when UART0CR2 = "10", longer than 192/fc [s]; and when UART0CR2 = "11", longer than 384/fc [s].
Page 172
TMP86CS28FG
UART0 Status Register
UART0SR (0FE5H) 7 PERR 6 FERR 5 OERR 4 RBFL 3 TEND 2 TBEP 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 11**)
PERR FERR OERR RBFL TEND TBEP
Parity error flag Framing error flag Overrun error flag Receive data buffer full flag Transmit end flag Transmit data buffer empty flag
0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1: 0: 1:
No parity error Parity error No framing error Framing error No overrun error Overrun error Receive data buffer empty Receive data buffer full On transmitting Transmit end Transmit data buffer full (Transmit data writing is finished) Transmit data buffer empty
Read only
Note: When an INTTXD is generated, TBEP flag is set to "1" automatically.
UART0 Receive Data Buffer
RD0BUF (0FE7H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
UART0 Transmit Data Buffer
TD0BUF (0FE7H) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Write only (Initial value: 0000 0000)
Page 173
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.3 Transfer Data Format TMP86CS28FG
13.3 Transfer Data Format
In UART0, an one-bit start bit (Low level), stop bit (Bit length selectable at high level, by UART0CR1), and parity (Select parity in UART0CR1; even- or odd-numbered parity by UART0CR1) are added to the transfer data. The transfer data formats are shown as follows.
PE
STBT
1
Start
2
Bit 0
3
Bit 1
Frame Length 8
Bit 6
9
Bit 7
10
Stop 1
11
12
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Stop 1
Stop 2
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Start
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Parity
Stop 1
Stop 2
Figure 13-2 Transfer Data Format
Without parity / 1 STOP bit
With parity / 1 STOP bit
Without parity / 2 STOP bit
With parity / 2 STOP bit
Figure 13-3 Caution on Changing Transfer Data Format
Note: In order to switch the transfer data format, perform transmit operations in the above Figure 13-3 sequence except for the initial setting.
Page 174
TMP86CS28FG
13.4 Transfer Rate
The baud rate of UART0 is set of UART0CR1. The example of the baud rate are shown as follows. Table 13-1 Transfer Rate (Example)
Source Clock BRG 16 MHz 000 001 010 011 100 101 76800 [baud] 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 8 MHz 38400 [baud] 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 4 MHz 19200 [baud] 9600 4800 2400 1200 600
When TC3 is used as the UART0 transfer rate (when UART0CR1 = "110"), the transfer clock and transfer rate are determined as follows: Transfer clock [Hz] = TC3 source clock [Hz] / TTREG3 setting value Transfer Rate [baud] = Transfer clock [Hz] / 16
13.5 Data Sampling Method
The UART0 receiver keeps sampling input using the clock selected by UART0CR1 until a start bit is detected in RXD0 pin input. RT clock starts detecting "L" level of the RXD0 pin. Once a start bit is detected, the start bit, data bits, stop bit(s), and parity bit are sampled at three times of RT7, RT8, and RT9 during one receiver clock interval (RT clock). (RT0 is the position where the bit supposedly starts.) Bit is determined according to majority rule (The data are the same twice or more out of three samplings).
RXD0 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0
Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (a) Without noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
RXD0 pin
Start bit RT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bit 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RT clock
Internal receive data
Start bit (b) With noise rejection circuit
Bit 0
Figure 13-4 Data Sampling Method
Page 175
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.6 STOP Bit Length TMP86CS28FG
13.6 STOP Bit Length
Select a transmit stop bit length (1 bit or 2 bits) by UART0CR1.
13.7 Parity
Set parity / no parity by UART0CR1 and set parity type (Odd- or Even-numbered) by UART0CR1.
13.8 Transmit/Receive Operation
13.8.1 Data Transmit Operation
Set UART0CR1 to "1". Read UART0SR to check UART0SR = "1", then write data in TD0BUF (Transmit data buffer). Writing data in TD0BUF zero-clears UART0SR, transfers the data to the transmit shift register and the data are sequentially output from the TXD0 pin. The data output include a one-bit start bit, stop bits whose number is specified in UART0CR1 and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART0CR1. When data transmit starts, transmit buffer empty flag UART0SR is set to "1" and an INTTXD0 interrupt is generated. While UART0CR1 = "0" and from when "1" is written to UART0CR1 to when send data are written to TD0BUF, the TXD0 pin is fixed at high level. When transmitting data, first read UART0SR, then write data in TD0BUF. Otherwise, UART0SR is not zero-cleared and transmit does not start.
13.8.2 Data Receive Operation
Set UART0CR1 to "1". When data are received via the RXD0 pin, the receive data are transferred to RD0BUF (Receive data buffer). At this time, the data transmitted includes a start bit and stop bit(s) and a parity bit if parity addition is specified. When stop bit(s) are received, data only are extracted and transferred to RD0BUF (Receive data buffer). Then the receive buffer full flag UART0SR is set and an INTRXD0 interrupt is generated. Select the data transfer baud rate using UART0CR1. If an overrun error (OERR) occurs when data are received, the data are not transferred to RD0BUF (Receive data buffer) but discarded; data in the RD0BUF are not affected.
Note:When a receive operation is disabled by setting UART0CR1 bit to "0", the setting becomes valid when data receive is completed. However, if a framing error occurs in data receive, the receive-disabling setting may not become valid. If a framing error occurs, be sure to perform a re-receive operation.
Page 176
TMP86CS28FG
13.9 Status Flag
13.9.1 Parity Error
When parity determined using the receive data bits differs from the received parity bit, the parity error flag UART0SR is set to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the RD0BUF is read after reading the UART0SR.
RXD0 pin
Parity
Stop
Shift register
UART0SR
xxxx0**
pxxxx0*
1pxxxx0
After reading UART0SR then RD0BUF clears PERR.
INTRXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-5 Generation of Parity Error 13.9.2 Framing Error
When "0" is sampled as the stop bit in the receive data, framing error flag UART0SR is set to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the RD0BUF is read after reading the UART0SR.
RXD0 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
UART0SR
xxx0**
xxxx0*
0xxxx0
After reading UART0SR then RD0BUF clears FERR.
INTRXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-6 Generation of Framing Error 13.9.3 Overrun Error
When all bits in the next data are received while unread data are still in RD0BUF, overrun error flag UART0SR is set to "1". In this case, the receive data is discarded; data in RD0BUF are not affected. The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the RD0BUF is read after reading the UART0SR.
Page 177
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.9 Status Flag TMP86CS28FG
UART0SR
RXD0 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD0BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
UART0SR
After reading UART0SR then RD0BUF clears OERR.
INTRXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-7 Generation of Overrun Error
Note:Receive operations are disabled until the overrun error flag UART0SR is cleared.
13.9.4 Receive Data Buffer Full
Loading the received data in RD0BUF sets receive data buffer full flag UART0SR to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the RD0BUF is read after reading the UART0SR.
RXD0 pin
Final bit
Stop
Shift register
RD0BUF
xxx0** yyyy
xxxx0*
1xxxx0
xxxx
After reading UART0SR then RD0BUF clears RBFL.
UART0SR
INTRXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-8 Generation of Receive Data Buffer Full
Note:If the overrun error flag UART0SR is set during the period between reading the UART0SR and reading the RD0BUF, it cannot be cleared by only reading the RD0BUF. Therefore, after reading the RD0BUF, read the UART0SR again to check whether or not the overrun error flag which should have been cleared still remains set.
13.9.5 Transmit Data Buffer Empty
When no data is in the transmit buffer TD0BUF, that is, when data in TD0BUF are transferred to the transmit shift register and data transmit starts, transmit data buffer empty flag UART0SR is set to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the TD0BUF is written after reading the UART0SR.
Page 178
TMP86CS28FG
Data write
TD0BUF
Data write
xxxx
yyyy
zzzz
Shift register
TXD0 pin
*****1
1xxxx0
*1xxxx Bit 0
****1x Final bit
*****1 Stop
1yyyy0
Start
UART0SR After reading UART0SR writing TD0BUF clears TBEP.
INTTXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-9 Generation of Transmit Data Buffer Empty 13.9.6 Transmit End Flag
When data are transmitted and no data is in TD0BUF (UART0SR = "1"), transmit end flag UART0SR is set to "1". The UART0SR is cleared to "0" when the data transmit is started after writing the TD0BUF.
Shift register
TXD0 pin
***1xx
****1x
*****1
1yyyy0
*1yyyy
Stop
Data write for TD0BUF
Start
Bit 0
UART0SR
UART0SR
INTTXD0 interrupt
Figure 13-10 Generation of Transmit End Flag and Transmit Data Buffer Empty
Page 179
13. Asynchronous Serial interface (UART0 )
13.9 Status Flag TMP86CS28FG
Page 180
TMP86CS28FG
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
The TMP86CS28FG have a 10-bit successive approximation type AD converter.
14.1 Configuration
The circuit configuration of the 10-bit AD converter is shown in Figure 14-1. It consists of control register ADCCR1 and ADCCR2, converted value register ADCDR1 and ADCDR2, a DA converter, a sample-hold circuit, a comparator, and a successive comparison circuit.
DA converter
VAREF AVSS
R/2
AVDD
R Reference voltage
R/2
Analog input multiplexer
AIN0
Sample hold circuit
A
Y 10 Analog comparator
AIN7
n S EN IREFON 4 SAIN ADRS AINDS
Successive approximate circuit Shift clock Control circuit 2 AMD 3 ACK ADCCR2 8 ADCDR1 2 INTADC
EOCF ADBF
ADCCR1
ADCDR2
AD converter control register 1, 2
AD conversion result register 1, 2
Note: Before using AD converter, set appropriate value to I/O port register conbining a analog input port. For details, see the section on "I/O ports".
Figure 14-1 10-bit AD Converter
Page 181
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.2 Register configuration TMP86CS28FG
14.2 Register configuration
The AD converter consists of the following four registers: 1. AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) This register selects the analog channels and operation mode (Software start or repeat) in which to perform AD conversion and controls the AD converter as it starts operating. 2. AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) This register selects the AD conversion time and controls the connection of the DA converter (Ladder resistor network). 3. AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) This register used to store the digital value fter being converted by the AD converter. 4. AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2) This register monitors the operating status of the AD converter. AD Converter Control Register 1
ADCCR1 (0FE2H) 7 ADRS 6 AMD 5 4 AINDS 3 2 SAIN 1 0 (Initial value: 0001 0000)
ADRS
AD conversion start
0: 1: 00: 01: 10: 11: 0: 1: 0000: 0001: 0010: 0011: 0100: 0101: 0110: 0111: 1000: 1001: 1010: 1011: 1100: 1101: 1110: 1111:
AD conversion start AD operation disable Software start mode Reserved Repeat mode Analog input enable Analog input disable AIN0 AIN1 AIN2 AIN3 AIN4 AIN5 AIN6 AIN7 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
AMD
AD operating mode
AINDS
Analog input control
R/W
SAIN
Analog input channel select
Note 1: Select analog input channel during AD converter stops (ADCDR2 = "0"). Note 2: When the analog input channel is all use disabling, the ADCCR1 should be set to "1". Note 3: During conversion, Do not perform port output instruction to maintain a precision for all of the pins because analog input port use as general input port. And for port near to analog input, Do not input intense signaling of change. Note 4: The ADCCR1 is automatically cleared to "0" after starting conversion. Note 5: Do not set ADCCR1 newly again during AD conversion. Before setting ADCCR1 newly again, check ADCDR2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine). Note 6: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register1 (ADCCR1) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR1 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode.
Page 182
TMP86CS28FG
AD Converter Control Register 2
ADCCR2 (0FE3H) 7 6 5 IREFON 4 "1" 3 2 ACK 1 0 "0" (Initial value: **0* 000*)
IREFON
DA converter (Ladder resistor) connection control
0: 1: 000: 001: 010: 011: 100: 101: 110: 111:
Connected only during AD conversion Always connected 39/fc Reserved 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc Reserved
ACK
AD conversion time select (Refer to the following table about the conversion time)
R/W
Note 1: Always set bit0 in ADCCR2 to "0" and set bit4 in ADCCR2 to "1". Note 2: When a read instruction for ADCCR2, bit6 to 7 in ADCCR2 read in as undefined data. Note 3: After STOP or SLOW/SLEEP mode are started, AD converter control register2 (ADCCR2) is all initialized and no data can be written in this register. Therfore, to use AD converter again, set the ADCCR2 newly after returning to NORMAL1 or NORMAL2 mode.
Table 14-1 ACK setting and Conversion time
Condition ACK 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 78/fc 156/fc 312/fc 624/fc 1248/fc 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Conversion time 39/fc 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 19.5 s Reserved 19.5 s 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s Reserved 39.0 s 78.0 s 156.0 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 15.6 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 31.2 s 62.4 s 124.8 s 10 MHz 5 MHz 2.5 MHz 15.6 s
Note 1: Setting for "-" in the above table are inhibited.
fc: High Frequency oscillation clock [Hz]
Note 2: Set conversion time setting should be kept more than the following time by Analog reference voltage (VAREF) .
VAREF = 4.5 to 5.5 V VAREF = 2.7 to 5.5 V 15.6 s and more 31.2 s and more
AD Converted value Register 1
ADCDR1 (0FE1H) 7 AD09 6 AD08 5 AD07 4 AD06 3 AD05 2 AD04 1 AD03 0 AD02 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
AD Converted value Register 2
ADCDR2 (0FE0H) 7 AD01 6 AD00 5 EOCF 4 ADBF 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
Page 183
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.2 Register configuration TMP86CS28FG
EOCF ADBF
AD conversion end flag AD conversion BUSY flag
0: 1: 0: 1:
Before or during conversion Conversion completed During stop of AD conversion During AD conversion
Read only
Note 1: The ADCDR2 is cleared to "0" when reading the ADCDR1. Therfore, the AD conversion result should be read to ADCDR2 more first than ADCDR1. Note 2: The ADCDR2 is set to "1" when AD conversion starts, and cleared to "0" when AD conversion finished. It also is cleared upon entering STOP mode or SLOW mode . Note 3: If a read instruction is executed for ADCDR2, read data of bit3 to bit0 are unstable.
Page 184
TMP86CS28FG
14.3 Function
14.3.1 Software Start Mode
After setting ADCCR1 to "01" (software start mode), set ADCCR1 to "1". AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1 is thereby started. After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2 is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. ADRS is automatically cleared after AD conversion has started. Do not set ADCCR1 newly again (Restart) during AD conversion. Before setting ADRS newly again, check ADCDR2 to see that the conversion is completed or wait until the interrupt signal (INTADC) is generated (e.g., interrupt handling routine).
AD conversion start ADCCR1 AD conversion start
ADCDR2
ADCDR1 status
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
ADCDR2
INTADC interrupt request ADCDR1 Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
ADCDR2
Figure 14-2 Software Start Mode 14.3.2 Repeat Mode
AD conversion of the voltage at the analog input pin specified by ADCCR1 is performed repeatedly. In this mode, AD conversion is started by setting ADCCR1 to "1" after setting ADCCR1 to "11" (Repeat mode). After completion of the AD conversion, the conversion result is stored in AD converted value registers (ADCDR1, ADCDR2) and at the same time ADCDR2 is set to 1, the AD conversion finished interrupt (INTADC) is generated. In repeat mode, each time one AD conversion is completed, the next AD conversion is started. To stop AD conversion, set ADCCR1 to "00" (Disable mode) by writing 0s. The AD convert operation is stopped immediately. The converted value at this time is not stored in the AD converted value register.
Page 185
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.3 Function TMP86CS28FG
ADCCR1 AD conversion start ADCCR1
"11"
"00"
Conversion operation
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
3rd conversion result
AD convert operation suspended. Conversion result is not stored.
3rd conversion result
ADCDR1,ADCDR2
Indeterminate
1st conversion result
2nd conversion result
ADCDR2 EOCF cleared by reading conversion result
INTADC interrupt request ADCDR1 ADCDR2 Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read Conversion result read
Conversion result read Conversion result read
Figure 14-3 Repeat Mode 14.3.3 Register Setting
1. Set up the AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) as follows: * Choose the channel to AD convert using AD input channel select (SAIN). * Specify analog input enable for analog input control (AINDS). * Specify AMD for the AD converter control operation mode (software or repeat mode). 2. Set up the AD converter control register 2 (ADCCR2) as follows: * Set the AD conversion time using AD conversion time (ACK). For details on how to set the conversion time, refer to Figure 14-1 and AD converter control register 2. * Choose IREFON for DA converter control. 3. After setting up (1) and (2) above, set AD conversion start (ADRS) of AD converter control register 1 (ADCCR1) to "1". If software start mode has been selected, AD conversion starts immediately. 4. After an elapse of the specified AD conversion time, the AD converted value is stored in AD converted value register 1 (ADCDR1) and the AD conversion finished flag (EOCF) of AD converted value register 2 (ADCDR2) is set to "1", upon which time AD conversion interrupt INTADC is generated. 5. EOCF is cleared to "0" by a read of the conversion result. However, if reconverted before a register read, although EOCF is cleared the previous conversion result is retained until the next conversion is completed.
Page 186
TMP86CS28FG
Example :After selecting the conversion time 19.5 s at 16 MHz and the analog input channel AIN3 pin, perform AD conversion once. After checking EOCF, read the converted value, store the lower 2 bits in address 0009EH nd store the upper 8 bits in address 0009FH in RAM. The operation mode is software start mode.
: (port setting) : LD LD : : (ADCCR1) , 00100011B (ADCCR2) , 11011000B ;Set port register approrriately before setting AD converter registers. (Refer to section I/O port in details) ; Select AIN3 ;Select conversion time(312/fc) and operation mode
SET SLOOP : TEST JRS
(ADCCR1) . 7 (ADCDR2) . 5 T, SLOOP
; ADRS = 1(AD conversion start) ; EOCF= 1 ?
LD LD LD LD
A , (ADCDR2) (9EH) , A A , (ADCDR1) (9FH), A
; Read result data
; Read result data
14.4 STOP/SLOW Modes during AD Conversion
When standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode) is entered forcibly during AD conversion, the AD convert operation is suspended and the AD converter is initialized (ADCCR1 and ADCCR2 are initialized to initial value). Also, the conversion result is indeterminate. (Conversion results up to the previous operation are cleared, so be sure to read the conversion results before entering standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode).) When restored from standby mode (STOP or SLOW mode), AD conversion is not automatically restarted, so it is necessary to restart AD conversion. Note that since the analog reference voltage is automatically disconnected, there is no possibility of current flowing into the analog reference voltage.
Page 187
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result TMP86CS28FG
14.5 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result
The analog input voltage is corresponded to the 10-bit digital value converted by the AD as shown in Figure 14-4.
3FFH 3FEH 3FDH AD conversion result 03H 02H 01H
VAREF AVSS
0
1
2
3 1021 1022 1023 1024 Analog input voltage
1024
Figure 14-4 Analog Input Voltage and AD Conversion Result (Typ.)
Page 188
TMP86CS28FG
14.6 Precautions about AD Converter
14.6.1 Analog input pin voltage range
Make sure the analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are used at voltages within VAREF to AVSS. If any voltage outside this range is applied to one of the analog input pins, the converted value on that pin becomes uncertain. The other analog input pins also are affected by that.
14.6.2 Analog input shared pins
The analog input pins (AIN0 to AIN7) are shared with input/output ports. When using any of the analog inputs to execute AD conversion, do not execute input/output instructions for all other ports. This is necessary to prevent the accuracy of AD conversion from degrading. Not only these analog input shared pins, some other pins may also be affected by noise arising from input/output to and from adjacent pins.
14.6.3 Noise Countermeasure
The internal equivalent circuit of the analog input pins is shown in Figure 14-5. The higher the output impedance of the analog input source, more easily they are susceptible to noise. Therefore, make sure the output impedance of the signal source in your design is 5 k or less. Toshiba also recommends attaching a capacitor external to the chip.
Internal resistance AINi Permissible signal source impedance
5 k (max) 5 k (typ)
Analog comparator
Internal capacitance
C = 22 pF (typ.)
DA converter
Note) i = 7 to 0
Figure 14-5
Analog Input Equivalent Circuit and Example of Input Pin Processing
Page 189
14. 10-bit AD Converter (ADC)
14.6 Precautions about AD Converter TMP86CS28FG
Page 190
TMP86CS28FG
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
In the TMP86CS28FG, the STOP mode is released by not only P20(INT5/STOP) pin but also four (STOP2 to STOP5) pins. When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the STOP pin needs to be used. In details, refer to the following section " 15.2 Control ".
15.1 Configuration
INT5 STOP mode release signal (1: Release) STOP
STOP2 STOP3 STOP4 STOP5
STOPCR (0031H)
Figure 15-1 Key-on Wakeup Circuit
15.2 Control
STOP2 to STOP5 pins can controlled by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR). It can be configured as enable/disable in 1-bit unit. When those pins are used for STOP mode release, configure corresponding I/O pins to input mode by I/O port register beforehand. Key-on Wakeup Control Register
STOPCR (0031H) 7 STOP5 6 STOP4 5 STOP3 4 STOP2 3 2 1 0 (Initial value: 0000 ****)
STOP5 STOP4 STOP3 STOP2
0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable 0:Disable 1:Enable
STOP5 STOP4 STOP3 STOP2
STOP mode released by STOP5 STOP mode released by STOP4 STOP mode released by STOP3 STOP mode released by STOP2
Write only Write only Write only Write only
15.3 Function
Stop mode can be entered by setting up the System Control Register (SYSCR1), and can be exited by detecting the "L" level on STOP2 to STOP5 pins, which are enabled by STOPCR, for releasing STOP mode (Note1).
Page 191
15. Key-on Wakeup (KWU)
15.3 Function TMP86CS28FG
Also, each level of the STOP2 to STOP5 pins can be confirmed by reading corresponding I/O port data register, check all STOP2 to STOP5 pins "H" that is enabled by STOPCR before the STOP mode is started (Note2,3).
Note 1: When the STOP mode released by the edge release mode (SYSCR1 = "0"), inhibit input from STOP2 to STOP5 pins by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) or must be set "H" level into STOP2 to STOP5 pins that are available input during STOP mode. Note 2: When the STOP pin input is high or STOP2 to STOP5 pins input which is enabled by STOPCR is low, executing an instruction which starts STOP mode will not place in STOP mode but instead will immediately start the release sequence (Warm up). Note 3: The input circuit of Key-on Wakeup input and Port input is separated, so each input voltage threshold value is different. Therefore, a value comes from port input before STOP mode start may be different from a value which is detected by Key-on Wakeup input (Figure 15-2). Note 4: STOP pin doesn't have the control register such as STOPCR, so when STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, STOP pin also should be used as STOP mode release function. Note 5: In STOP mode, Key-on Wakeup pin which is enabled as input mode (for releasing STOP mode) by Key-on Wakeup Control Register (STOPCR) may generate the penetration current, so the said pin must be disabled AD conversion input (analog voltage input). Note 6: When the STOP mode is released by STOP2 to STOP5 pins, the level of STOP pin should hold "L" level (Figure 15-3).
Port input Key-on wakeup input
External pin
Figure 15-2 Key-on Wakeup Input and Port Input
a) STOP
b) In case of STOP2 to STOP5
STOP pin STOP mode Release STOP mode
STOP pin "L"
STOP2 pin
STOP mode
Release STOP mode
Figure 15-3 Priority of STOP pin and STOP2 to STOP5 pins
Table 15-1 Release level (edge) of STOP mode
Release level (edge) Pin name SYSCR1="1" (Note2) "H" level "L" level "L" level "L" level "L" level SYSCR1="0" Rising edge Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1) Don't use (Note1)
STOP
STOP2 STOP3 STOP4 STOP5
Page 192
TMP86CS28FG
16. LCD Driver
The TMP86CS28FG has a driver and control circuit to directly drive the liquid crystal device (LCD). The pins to be connected to LCD are as follows: 1. Segment output port 40 pins (SEG39 to SEG0) 2. Common output port4 pins (COM3 to COM0) In addition, C0, C1, V1, V2, V3 pin are provided for the LCD driver's booster circuit. The devices that can be directly driven is selectable from LCD of the following drive methods: 1. 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias) LCD 2. 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) LCD 3. 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias) LCD 4. Static LCD Max 160 Segments(8 segments x 20 digits) Max 120 Segments(8 segments x 15 digits) Max 80 Segments(8 segments x 10 digits) Max 40 Segments(8 segments x 5 digits)
16.1 Configuration
LCDCR 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SLF DBR fc/217, fs/29 fc/216, fs/28 fc/215 fc/213 display data area 0 EDSP BRES VFSEL DUTY
Duty control fc/213, fs/25 fc/211, fs/23 fc/210, fs/22 fc/29 Constant voltage booster circuit Blanking control
Timing control
Display data select control
Display data buffer register
Common driver
Segment driver
C0 C1
V1 V2 V3
COM0
to
COM3
SEG0
SEG39
Figure 16-1 LCD Driver
Note: The LCD driver incorporates a dedicated divider circuit. Therefore, the break function of a debugger (development tool) will not stop LCD driver output.
Page 193
16. LCD Driver
16.2 Control TMP86CS28FG
16.2 Control
The LCD driver is controlled using the LCD control register (LCDCR). The LCD driver's display is enabled using the EDSP. LCD Driver Control Register
LCDCR (0FD9H) 7 EDSP 6 BRES 5 VFSEL 4 3 DUTY 2 1 SLF 0 (Initial value: 0000 0000)
EDSP BRES
LCD Display Control Booster circuit control
0: Blanking 1: Enables LCD display (Blanking is released) 0: Disable (use divider resistance) 1: Enable NORMAL1/2, IDLE/1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 00 fc/213 fc/211 fc/210 fc/29 DV7CK = 1 fs/25 fs/23 fs/22 fc/29 SLOW1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 mode fs/25 fs/23 fs/22 - R/W
VFSEL
Selection of boost frequency
01 10 11
DUTY
Selection of driving methods
00: 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias) 01: 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) 10: 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias) 11: Static NORMAL1/2, IDLE/1/2 mode DV7CK = 0 DV7CK = 1 fs/29 fs/28 fc/215 fc/213 SLOW1/2, SLEEP0/1/2 mode fs/29 fs/28 - -
SLF
Selection of LCD frame frequency
00 01 10 11
fc/217 fc/216 fc/215 fc/213
Note 1: When (Booster circuit control) is set to "0", VDD V3 V2 V1 VSS should be satisfied. When is set to "1", 5.5 [V] V3 VDD should be satisfied. If these conditions are not satisfied, it not only affects the quality of LCD display but also may damage the device due to over voltage of the port. Note 2: When used as the booster circuit, bias should be composed to 1/3. Therefore, do not set LCDCR to "10" or "11" when the booster circuit is enable. Note 3: Do not set SLF to "10" or "11" in SLOW1/2 modes. Note 4: Do not set VFSEL to "11" SLOW1/2 modes.
Page 194
TMP86CS28FG
16.2.1 LCD driving methods
As for LCD driving method, 4 types can be selected by LCDCR. The driving method is initialized in the initial program according to the LCD used.
VLCD3 1/fF VLCD3 1/fF
0
0
-VLCD3
Data "1" (a) 1/4 Duty (1/3 Bias)
Data "0"
-VLCD3
Data "1"
Data "0"
(b) 1/3 Duty (1/3 Bias) VLCD3 1/fF
VLCD3
1/fF
0 -VLCD3 Data "1" Data "0"
0
-VLCD3 (c) 1/2 Duty (1/2 Bias)
Data "1" (d) Static
Data "0"
Note 1: fF: Frame frequency Note 2: VLCD3: LCD drive voltage
Figure 16-2 LCD Drive Waveform (COM-SEG pins)
Page 195
16. LCD Driver
16.2 Control TMP86CS28FG
16.2.2 Frame frequency
Frame frequency (fF) is set according to driving method and base frequency as shown in the following Table 16-1. The base frequency is selected by LCDCR according to the frequency fc and fs of the basic clock to be used. Table 16-1 Setting of LCD Frame Frequency
(a) At the single clock mode. At the dual clock mode (DV7CK = 0). Frame frequency [Hz] SLF Base frequency [Hz] 1/4 Duty 1/3 Duty 1/2 Duty Static
fc ------17 2
00 (fc = 16 MHz) (fc = 8 MHz)
fc ------17 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 17
163 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 17
244 122
fc ------17 2
122 61
fc ------16 2
01 (fc = 8 MHz) (fc = 4 MHz)
fc ------16 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 16
163 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 16
244 122
fc ------16 2
122 61
fc ------15 2
10 (fc = 4 MHz) (fc = 2 MHz)
fc ------15 2
122 61
4 fc -- * ------3 2 15
163 81
4 fc -- * ------2 2 15
244 122
fc ------15 2
122 61
11
fc ------13 2
(fc = 1 MHz)
fc ------13 2
122
4 fc -- * ------3 2 13
163
4 fc -- * ------2 2 13
244
fc ------13 2
122
Note: fc: High-frequency clock [Hz]
Table 16-2
(b) At the dual clock mode (DV7CK = 1 or SYSCK = 1) Frame frequency [Hz] SLF Base frequency [Hz] 1/4 Duty 1/3 Duty 1/2 Duty Static
00
fs ----9 2
(fs = 32.768 kHz)
fs ----9 2
64
4 fs -- * ----3 29
85
4 fs -- * ----2 29
128
fs ----9 2
64
01
fs ----8 2
(fs = 32.768 kHz)
fs ----8 2
128
4 fs -- * ----3 28
171
4 fs -- * ----2 28
256
fs ----8 2
128
Note: fs: Low-frequency clock [Hz]
Page 196
TMP86CS28FG
16.2.3 Driving method for LCD driver
In the TMP86CS28FG, LCD driving voltages can be generated using either an internal booster circuit or an external resistor divider. This selection is made in LCDCR.
16.2.3.1 When using the booster circuit (LCDCR="1")
When the reference voltage is connected to the V1 pin, the booster circuit boosts the reference voltage twofold (V2) or threefold (V3) to generate the output voltages for segment/common signals. When the reference voltage is connected to the V2 pin, it is reduced to 1/2 (V1) or boosted to 3/2 (V3). When the reference voltage is connected to the V3 pin, it is reduced to 1/3 (V1) or 2/3 (V2). LCDCR is used to select the reference frequency in the booster circuit. The faster the boosting frequency, the higher the segment/common drive capability, but power consumption is increased. Conversely, the slower the boosting frequency, the lower the segment/common drive capability, but power consumption is reduced. If the drive capability is insufficient, the LCD may not be displayed clearly. Therefore, select an optimum boosting frequency for the LCD panel to be used. Table 16-3 shows the V3 pin current capacity and boosting frequency.
Note: When used as the booster circuit, bias should be composed to 1/3. Therefore, do not set LCDCR to "10" or "11" when the booster circuit is enable (LCDCR="1").
Keep the following condition. V3 V1 = 1/3 x V3 C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
VDD V3 V2 V1 C C
Reference voltage C1 C0 VSS a) Reference pin = V1 VDD V3 V2 V1 C C C Reference voltage C1 C0 VSS C C
Keep the following condition. V3 V2 = 2/3 x V3 C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
b) Reference pin = V2
Page 197
16. LCD Driver
16.2 Control TMP86CS28FG
Keep the following condition. V3 C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
VDD V3 V2 V1 C C C Reference voltage
C1 C0 VSS
C
c) Reference pin = V3
Keep the following condition. V3 = C = 0.1 to 0.47 F
VDD V3 V2 V1 C C C
C1 C0 VSS
C
d) Reference pin = V3
Note 1: When the TMP86CS28FG uses the booster circuit to drive the LCD, the power supply and capacitor for the booster circuit should be connected as shown above. Note 2: When the reference voltage is connected to a pin other than V1, add a capacitor between V1 and GND. Note 3: The connection examples shown above are different from those shown in the datasheets of the previous version. Since the above connection method enhances the boosting characteristics, it is recommended that new boards be designed using the above connection method. (Using the existing connection method does not affect LCD display.)
Figure 16-3 Connection Examples When Using the Booster Circuit (LCDCR = "1")
Table 16-3 V3 Pin Current Capacity and Boosting Frequency (typ.)
VFSEL 00 01 10 11 Boosting frequency fc/213 or fs/25 fc/211 or fs/23 fc/210 or fs/22 fc/29 fc = 16 MHz -37 mV/ A -19 mV/ A -17 mV/ A -16 mV/ A fc = 8 MHz -80 mV/ A -24 mV/ A -19 mV/ A -17 mV/ A fc = 4 MHz -138 mV/ A -37 mV/ A -24 mV/ A -19 mV/ A fc = 32.768 MHz -76 mV/ A -23 mV/ A -18 mV/ A -
Note 1: The current capacity is the amount of voltage that falls per 1A. Note 2: The boosting frequency should be selected depending on your LCD panel. Note 3: For the reference pin V1 or V2, a current capacity ten times larger than the above is recommended to ensure stable operation. For example, when the boosting frequency is fc/29 (at fc = 8 MHz), -1.7 mV/ A or more is recommended for the current capacity of the reference pin V1.
16.2.3.2 When using an external resistor divider (LCDCR="0")
When an external resistor divider is used, the voltage of an external power supply is divided and input on V1, V2, and V3 to generate the output voltages for segment/common signals. Page 198
TMP86CS28FG
The smaller the external resistor value, the higher the segment/common drive capability, but power consumption is increased. Conversely, the larger the external resistor value, the lower the segment/common drive capability, but power consumption is reduced. If the drive capability is insufficient, the LCD may not be displayed clearly. Therefore, select an optimum resistor value for the LCD panel to be used.
Adjustment of contrast VDD V3 R1 V2 C0 C1 V1 R3 VSS 1/3 Bias (R1 = R2 = R3) Keep the following conditon. VDD V3 V2 V1 VSS Open Open R2 VDD
Adjustment of contrast V3 R1 V2 C0 C1 V1 R2 VSS Static Open Open VDD
Adjustment of contrast V3 V2 C0 C1 V1 R1 Open Open
1/2 Bias (R1 = R2)
VSS
Figure 16-4 Connection Examples When Using an External Resistor Divider (LCDCR = "0")
16.3 LCD Display Operation
16.3.1 Display data setting
Display data is stored to the display data area (assigned to address 0FC0H to 0FD3H, 20bytes) in the DBR. The display data which are stored in the display data area is automatically read out and sent to the LCD driver by the hardware. The LCD driver generates the segment signal and common signal according to the display data and driving method. Therefore, display patterns can be changed by only over writing the contents of display data area by the program. Table 16-5 shows the correspondence between the display data area and SEG/ COM pins. LCD light when display data is "1" and turn off when "0". According to the driving method of LCD, the number of pixels which can be driven becomes different, and the number of bits in the display data area which is used to store display data also becomes different. Therefore, the bits which are not used to store display data as well as the data buffer which corresponds to the addresses not connected to LCD can be used to store general user process data (see Table 16-4).
Note:The display data memory contents become unstable when the power supply is turned on; therefore, the display data memory should be initialized by an initiation routine.
Table 16-4 Driving Method and Bit for Display Data
Driving methods 1/4 Duty 1/3 Duty 1/2 Duty Static Bit 7/3 COM3 - - - Bit 6/2 COM2 COM2 - - Bit 5/1 COM1 COM1 COM1 - Bit 4/0 COM0 COM0 COM0 COM0
Page 199
16. LCD Driver
16.3 LCD Display Operation TMP86CS28FG
Note: -: This bit is not used for display data
Table 16-5 LCD Display Data Area (DBR)
Address 0FC0H 0FC1H 0FC2H 0FC3H 0FC4H 0FC5H 0FC6H 0FC7H 0FC8H 0FC9H 0FCAH 0FCBH 0FCCH 0FCDH 0FCEH 0FCFH 0FD0H 0FD1H 0FD2H 0FD3H COM3 Bit 7 Bit 6 SEG1 SEG3 SEG5 SEG7 SEG9 SEG11 SEG13 SEG15 SEG17 SEG19 SEG21 SEG23 SEG25 SEG27 SEG29 SEG31 SEG33 SEG35 SEG37 SEG39 COM2 COM1 COM0 COM3 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 SEG0 SEG2 SEG4 SEG6 SEG8 SEG10 SEG12 SEG14 SEG16 SEG18 SEG20 SEG22 SEG24 SEG26 SEG28 SEG30 SEG32 SEG34 SEG36 SEG38 COM2 COM1 COM0 Bit 1 Bit 0
16.3.2 Blanking
Blanking is enabled when EDSP is cleared to "0". Blanking turns off LCD through outputting a GND level to SEG/COM pin. When in STOP mode, EDSP is cleared to "0" and automatically blanked. To redisplay ICD after exiting STOP mode, it is necessary to set EDSP back to "1".
Note:During reset, the LCD common outputs are fixed "0" level. But the multiplex terminal of input/output port and LCD segment output becomes high impedance. Therefore, when the reset input is long remarkably, ghost problem may appear in LCD display.
Page 200
TMP86CS28FG
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver
16.4.1 Initial setting
Figure 16-5 shows the flowchart of initialization. Example : To operate a 1/4 duty LCD of 40 segments x 4 com-mons at frame frequency fc/216 [Hz], and booster frequency fc/213 [Hz]
LD LD : : LD (LCDCR), 01000001B (P*LCR), 0FFH : : (LCDCR), 11000001B ; Sets the initial value of display data. ; Display enable ; Sets LCD driving method and frame frequency. Boost frequency ; Sets segment output control register. (*; Port No.)
Sets LCD driving method (DUTY). Sets boost frequency (VFSEL). Sets frame frequency (SLF). Enables booster circuit (BRES) Sets segment output control registers (P*LCR (*; Port No.)) Initialization of display data area.
Display enable (EDSP) (Releases from blanking.)
Figure 16-5 Initial Setting of LCD Driver 16.4.2 Store of display data
Generally, display data are prepared as fixed data in program memory (ROM) and stored in display data area by load command.
Page 201
16. LCD Driver
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver TMP86CS28FG
Example :To display using 1/4 duty LCD a numerical value which corresponds to the LCD data stored in data memory at address 80H (when pins COM and SEG are connected to LCD as in Figure 16-6), display data become as shown in Table 16-6.
LD ADD LD LD LD RET TABLE: DB 11011111B, 00000110B, 11100011B, 10100111B, 00110110B, 10110101B, 11110101B, 00010111B, 11110111B, 10110111B A, (80H) A, TABLE-$-7 HL, 0F80H W, (PC + A) (HL), W
Note:DB is a byte data difinition instruction.
COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG0 SEG1 COM3
Figure 16-6 Example of COM, SEG Pin Connection (1/4 Duty)
Table 16-6 Example of Display Data (1/4 Duty)
No. display Display data No. display Display data
0
11011111
5
10110101
1
00000110
6
11110101
2
11100011
7
00000111
3
10100111
8
11110111
4
00110110
9
10110111
Page 202
TMP86CS28FG
Example 2: Table 16-6 shows an example of display data which are displayed using 1/2 duty LCD in the same way as Table 16-7. The connection between pins COM and SEG are the same as shown in Figure 16-7.
COM0 SEG3 SEG0 SEG2 SEG1 COM1
Figure 16-7 Example of COM, SEG Pin Connection
Table 16-7 Example of Display Data (1/2 Duty)
Display data Number High order address 0 1 2 3 4 **01**11 **00**10 **10**01 **10**10 **11**10 Low order address **01**11 **00**10 **01**11 **01**11 **00**10 5 6 7 8 9 Number High order address **11**10 **11**11 **01**10 **11**11 **11**10 Low order address **01**01 **01**01 **00**11 **01**11 **01**11 Display data
Note: *: Don't care
Page 203
16. LCD Driver
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver TMP86CS28FG
16.4.3 Example of LCD drive output
COM0 COM1 COM2 SEG0 SEG1 COM3
EDSP SEG0 VLCD3 0 SEG1 VLCD3 0 Display data area Address
0FC0H 1011 0101
VLCD3 COM0 0 VLCD3 COM1 0 VLCD3 COM2 0 VLCD3 COM3 0 VLCD3
COM0-SEG0 (Selected)
0 -VLCD3 VLCD3
COM2-SEG1 (Non selected)
0 -VLCD3
Figure 16-8 1/4 Duty (1/3 bias) Drive
Page 204
TMP86CS28FG
SEG1 SEG2 SEG0 COM0 COM1 COM2
EDSP SEG0 VLCD3 0 SEG1 VLCD3 0 SEG2 VLCD3 0 COM0 VLCD3 0 *: Don't care COM1 0 VLCD3 COM2 0 VLCD3 COM0-SEG1 (Selected) 0 -VLCD3 VLCD3 COM1-SEG2 (Non selected) 0 -VLCD3 VLCD3
Display data area Address
0FC0H 0FC1H
*111 *010 **** *001
Figure 16-9 1/3 Duty (1/3 bias) Drive
Page 205
16. LCD Driver
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver TMP86CS28FG
COM0
SEG3 COM0 COM2 COM1
COM1
EDSP VLCD3 SEG0 0 Display data area Address
0FC0H **01 **01 0FC1H **11 **10
SEG1
VLCD3 0
SEG2
VLCD3 0 VLCD3
SEG3
0 VLCD3
*: Don't care
COM0 0 VLCD3 COM1 0 VLCD3 0 VLCD3 -VLCD3 COM1-SEG2 (Non selected) 0 -VLCD3
COM0-SEG1 (Selected)
Figure 16-10 1/2 Duty (1/2 bias) Drive
Page 206
TMP86CS28FG
SEG0 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG1 SEG6 SEG2 SEG7 COM0
Display data area Address
0FC0H 0FC1H 0FC2H 0FC3H
EDSP ***0 ***1 ***1 ***1 ***1 ***0 ***0 ***1 SEG7 SEG4 SEG0 VLCD3 0 VLCD3 0 VLCD3 0 COM0 VLCD3 0
*: Don't care
VLCD3 COM0-SEG0 (Selected) 0 -VLCD3 VLCD3 COM0-SEG4 (Non selected) 0 -VLCD3
Figure 16-11 Static Drive
Page 207
16. LCD Driver
16.4 Control Method of LCD Driver TMP86CS28FG
Page 208
TMP86CS28FG
17. Input/Output Circuitry
17.1 Control Pins
The input/output circuitries of the TMP86CS28FG control pins are shown below.
Control Pin I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Osc. enable
fc VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (high-frequency) Rf = 1.2 M (typ.) RO = 0.5 k (typ.)
VDD
XIN XOUT Input Output
Rf
XIN
XOUT
Osc. enable
XTEN fs VDD RO
Resonator connecting pins (Low-frequency) Rf = 6 M (typ.) RO = 220 k (typ.)
XTIN XTOUT
Input Output
VDD
Rf
XTIN
XTOUT
VDD RIN
RESET
Input
Address-trap-reset Watchdog-timer System-clock-reset
Hysteresis input Pull-up resistor RIN = 220 k (typ.)
VDD R
TEST Input
D1 RIN
Pull-down resistor RIN = 70 k (typ.) R = 1 k (typ.)
Page 209
17. Input/Output Circuitry
17.2 Input/Output Ports TMP86CS28FG
17.2 Input/Output Ports
Port I/O Input/Output Circuitry Remarks
Initial "High-Z" VDD
Input Output
P0,P3
Pch control Data output Input from output latch Pin input R
Sink open drain output or C-MOS output Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" Data output
P1 Input Output
AIN VDD
Tri-state I/O Hysteresis input AIN input R = 100 W (typ.)
Disable Pin input
R
Initial "High-Z"
VDD
P2
Input Output
Data output Input from output latch Pin input R
Sink open drain output Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
Initial "High-Z" Pch control Data output Input from output latch Pin input
SEG output VDD
Sink open drain output or C-MOS output Hysteresis input R = 100 (typ.)
P4,P5,P6,P7,P8
Input Output
R
LCD segment output
Page 210
TMP86CS28FG
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
The absolute maximum ratings are rated values which must not be exceeded during operation, even for an instant. Any one of the ratings must not be exceeded. If any absolute maximum rating is exceeded, a device may break down or its performance may be degraded, causing it to catch fire or explode resulting in injury to the user. Thus, when designing products which include this device, ensure that no absolute maximum rating value will ever be exceeded.
(VSS = 0 V) Parameter Supply voltage Input voltage Output voltage Output current (Per 1 pin) Symbol VDD VIN VOUT IOL1 IOH1 IOL1 IOH1 PD Tsld Tstg Topr P0,P1,P2,P3,P4,P5,P6,P7,P8 ports P0,P1,P3,P4,P5,P6,P7,P8 ports P0,P1,P2,P3,P4,P5,P6,P7,P8 ports P0,P1,P3,P4,P5,P6,P7,P8 ports Pins Ratings -0.3 to 6.5 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 -0.3 to VDD + 0.3 3.2 -1.8 80 -30 350 260 (10 s) -55 to 125 -40 to 85 C mW mA V Unit
Output current (Total) Power dissipation [Topr = 85C] Soldering temperature (Time) Storage temperature Operating temperature
Page 211
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.2 Operating Condition TMP86CS28FG
18.2 Operating Condition
The Operating Conditions show the conditions under which the device be used in order for it to operate normally while maintaining its quality. If the device is used outside the range of Operating Conditions (power supply voltage, operating temperature range, or AC/DC rated values), it may operate erratically. Therefore, when designing your application equipment, always make sure its intended working conditions will not exceed the range of Operating Conditions.
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Pins fc = 16 MHz Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode IDLE0, 1, 2 mode NORMAL1, 2 mode IDLE0, 1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP0, 1, 2 mode STOP mode VIH1 Input high level VIH2 VIH3 VIL1 Input low level VIL2 VIL3 fc fs LCD reference voltage range Capacity for LCD booster circuit V1 CLCD XIN, XOUT XTIN, XTOUT Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input Except hysteresis input Hysteresis input VDD 4.5 V VDD < 4.5 V VDD 4.5 V VDD < 4.5 V VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V VDD = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V 1.0 30.0 0.9 0.1 VDD x 0.70 VDD x 0.75 VDD x 0.90 VDD x 0.30 0 VDD x 0.25 VDD x 0.10 8.0 16.0 34.0 1.8 0.47 MHz kHz V uF VDD V 2.7 5.5 Min 4.0 Max Unit
Supply voltage
VDD
fc = 8 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz
Clock frequency
LCD booster circuit enable (V3 VDD)
Page 212
TMP86CS28FG
18.3 DC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Hysteresis voltage Input current Symbol VHS IIN1 IIN2 RIN1 RIN2 ILO VOH VOL V2-3OUT Pins Hysteresis input Sink open drain, Tri-state
RESET, STOP
Condition
Min -
Typ. 0.9 - 70 220 - - - V1 x 2 V1 x 3 8.5 6 8.5 6.1 5 0.5
Max - 2 - 450 2 - 0.4 - - 11.5
Unit V A
VDD = 5.5 V, VIN = 5.5 V/0 V
- - 100
Input resistance Output leakage current Output high voltage Output low voltage LCD output voltage use LCD driver's booste Supply current in NORMAL 1, 2 mode Supply current in IDLE 0, 1, 2 mode Supply current in SLOW 1 mode Supply current in SLEEP 1 mode Supply current in SLEEP 0 mode Supply current in STOP mode
TEST pull-dwon
RESET pull-up
k A V
Sink open drain, Tri-state C-MOS, Tri-st port Except XOUT V2 terminal V3 terminal
VDD = 5.5 V, VOUT = 5.5 V/0 V VDD = 4.5 V, IOH = -0.7 mA VDD = 4.5 V, IOL = 1.6 mA V3 VDD Reference supply terminal :V1 SEG/COM terminal no load VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V fc = 16 MHz fs = 32.768 kHz
- 4.1 - - - - - -
V
mA 8.5 20 15 A - 11 10
IDD
VDD = 3.0 V VIN = 2.8 V/0.2 V fs = 32.768 kHz -
VDD = 5.5 V VIN = 5.3 V/0.2 V
-
Note 1: Typical values show those at Topr = 25C, VDD = 5 V Note 2: Input current (IIN1, IIN2); The current through pull-up or pull-down resistor is not included. Note 3: IDD does not include IREF current. Note 4: The supply currents of SLOW 2 and SLEEP 2 modes are equivalent to IDLE 0, 1, 2.
Page 213
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.4 AD Conversion Characteristics TMP86CS28FG
18.4 AD Conversion Characteristics
(VSS = 0.0 V, 4.5 V VDD 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog reference voltage Power supply voltage of analog control circuit (Note6) Analog reference voltage range (Note4) Analog input voltage Power supply current of analog reference voltage Non linearity error Zero point error Full scale error Total error VDD = AVDD = 5.0 V VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 5.0 V Symbol VAREF AVDD AVSS VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 5.5 V VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V 3.5 AVSS - - - - - Condition Min AVDD - 1.0 Typ. - VDD VSS - - 0.6 - - - - - VAREF 1.0 2 2 2 2 LSB mA V Max AVDD Unit
(VSS = 0.0 V, 2.7 V VDD < 4.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Analog reference voltage Power supply voltage of analog control circuit (Note6) Analog reference voltage range (Note4) Analog input voltage Power supply current of analog reference voltage Non linearity error Zero point error Full scale error Total error VDD = AVDD = 2.7 V VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V VAREF = 2.7 V Symbol VAREF AVDD AVSS VAREF VAIN IREF VDD = AVDD = VAREF = 4.5 V VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V 2.5 VSS - - - - - Condition Min AVDD - 1.0 Typ. - VDD VSS - - 0.5 - - - - - VAREF 0.8 2 2 2 2 LSB mA V Max AVDD Unit
Note 1: The total error includes all errors except a quantization error, and is defined as a maximum deviation from the ideal conversion line. Note 2: Conversion time is different in recommended value by power supply voltage. About conversion time, please refer to "Register Configuration". Note 3: Please use input voltage to AIN input Pin in limit of VAREF to VSS. When voltage of range outside is input, conversion value becomes unsettled and gives affect to other channel conversion value. Note 4: Analog reference voltage range: VAREF = VAREF - VSS Note 5: The AVDD pin should be fixed on the VDD level even though AD converter is not used.
Page 214
TMP86CS28FG
18.5 AC Characteristics
(VSS = 0 V, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode Machine cycle time tcy IDLE1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP1, 2 mode High level clock pulse width Low level clock pulse width High level clock pulse width Low level clock pulse width tWCH tWCL tWCH tWCL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 16 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.25 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
31.25
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
(VSS = 0 V, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, Topr = -40 to 85C) Parameter Symbol Condition NORMAL1, 2 mode Machine cycle time tcy IDLE1, 2 mode SLOW1, 2 mode SLEEP1, 2 mode High level clock pulse width Low level clock pulse width High level clock pulse width Low level clock pulse width tWCH tWCL tWCH tWCL For external clock operation (XIN input) fc = 8 MHz For external clock operation (XTIN input) fs = 32.768 kHz Min 0.5 Typ. - Max 4 s 117.6 - 133.3 Unit
-
62.5
-
ns
-
15.26
-
s
Page 215
18. Electrical Characteristics
18.6 Recommended Oscillating Conditions TMP86CS28FG
18.6 Recommended Oscillating Conditions
XIN XOUT XTIN XTOUT
C1
C2
C1
C2
(1) High-frequency Oscillation
(2) Low-frequency Oscillation
Note 1: To ensure stable oscillation, the resonator position, load capacitance, etc. must be appropriate. Because these factors are greatly affected by board patterns, please be sure to evaluate operation on the board on which the device will actually be mounted. Note 2: For the resonators to be used with Toshiba microcontrollers, we recommend ceramic resonators manufactured by Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd. For details, please visit the website of Murata at the following URL: http://www.murata.com
18.7 Handling Precaution
- The solderability test conditions for lead-free products (indicated by the suffix G in product name) are shown below. 1. When using the Sn-37Pb solder bath Solder bath temperature = 230 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used 2. When using the Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu solder bath Solder bath temperature = 245 C Dipping time = 5 seconds Number of times = once R-type flux used Note: The pass criteron of the above test is as follows: Solderability rate until forming 95 % - When using the device (oscillator) in places exposed to high electric fields such as cathode-ray tubes, we recommend electrically shielding the package in order to maintain normal operating condition.
Page 216
TMP86CS28FG
19. Package Dimensions
QFP80-P-1420-0.80B Rev 01
Unit: mm
Page 217
19. Package Dimensions
TMP86CS28FG
Page 218
This is a technical document that describes the operating functions and electrical specifications of the 8-bit microcontroller series TLCS-870/C (LSI). Toshiba provides a variety of development tools and basic software to enable efficient software development. These development tools have specifications that support advances in microcomputer hardware (LSI) and can be used extensively. Both the hardware and software are supported continuously with version updates. The recent advances in CMOS LSI production technology have been phenomenal and microcomputer systems for LSI design are constantly being improved. The products described in this document may also be revised in the future. Be sure to check the latest specifications before using. Toshiba is developing highly integrated, high-performance microcomputers using advanced MOS production technology and especially well proven CMOS technology. We are prepared to meet the requests for custom packaging for a variety of application areas. We are confident that our products can satisfy your application needs now and in the future.


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of TMP86CS28FG

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X